DENON AVR-X6800H Integrated Network AV Receiver User Guide

User Guide for DENON models including: AVR-X6800H, 033AVX6800, 033AVX6800, AVR-X6800H Integrated Network AV Receiver, AVR-X6800H, Integrated Network AV Receiver, Network AV Receiver, AV Receiver, Receiver

033AVX6800

033AVX6800, Denon AVR-X6800H Dolby Atmos 11.2 ch 8K AVR, WWW.CRUTCHFIELD.COM

HNEWBERRY

Denon AVR-X6800H owner's manual

Denon AVR-X6800H 11.4-channel home theater receiver with Dolby AtmosÂ , BluetoothÂ , Apple AirPlayÂ 2, and Amazon Alexa compatibility at Crutchfield

File Info : application/pdf, 374 Pages, 18.17MB

033AVX6800

AVR-X6800H
INTEGRATED NETWORK AV RECEIVER
Quick Start Guide

Welcome
Thank you for choosing a Denon AVR. Use the Setup Assistant function to help configure the settings for this unit when you first set it up. Follow the guidance displayed on the TV screen connected to this unit to configure the settings. This manual describes the procedure up until starting the Setup Assistant.

Please do not return this product to the store. If you need help...
1

Scan the QR code or visit support.denon.com/ for setup help, technical support, warranty assistance, or customer support contact information.

Before you begin

Required for setup

Speaker cables

HDMI® cable

Subwoofer cable

Speakers

Optional

LAN cable

Wi-Fi® router

· When connecting this unit to a device that is compatible with the Deep Color, 4K, ARC and eARC functions, use a "High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet" that displays the HDMI logo.
· When connecting this unit to a device that is compatible with 8K and 4K 120Hz video, use a certified "Ultra High Speed HDMI cable". If you use a different HDMI cable, the video may not display or other problems may occur.
2

What's in the box
Quick Start Guide
Safety instructions
Notes on radio
Warranty (for North America model only)
Cable labels

AVR
Power cord
FM indoor antenna
AM loop antenna Sound calibration microphone

Sound calibration microphone stand
Remote control (RC-1256)
2× R03/AAA batteries
External antennas for Bluetooth®/Wi-Fi connectivity

· The included sound calibration microphone stand is convenient for performing speaker calibration. Using your own tripod or the supplied Sound calibration microphone stand enables settings to be automatically configured to the optimum listening environment, providing exceptionally high performance.
3

Attach the included cable labels

The supplied cable labels include labels for the speaker and HDMI cables.

Attach a cable label to each cable that matches the speakers and HDMI devices being connected, as shown below.

This makes it easy to identify and properly connect the cables between your components.

Setup
Connect the antennas
1) Place the antenna evenly over the antenna terminal located at the upper left or right corner of the rear panel.
2) Turn the antenna clockwise until it is fully connected. Do not over tighten.
3) Rotate the antenna upwards for the best possible reception.

Optional
If you are connecting the AVR to a wired network, connect an Ethernet cable (not included) between the AVR and your router. Do not connect the Ethernet cable if you are connecting the AVR to a wireless network.

Router

LAN port

· The antennas are required for both Bluetooth and Wi-Fi functions.
5

Connect the power cord
Place the AVR near your TV and connect the power cord.

Power cord

AVR

EN FR ES
6

Connect the AVR to your TV

HDMI OUT TV 1
(ARC/eARC)

HDMI IN (ARC/eARC)

Using a high quality HDMI cable*, connect one end to the HDMI port labeled "eARC" or "ARC" on your TV. Connect the other end to the HDMI OUT TV 1 port on your AVR.

HDMI cable

What is ARC and eARC? Audio Return Channel or "ARC" sends audio back to the AVR using the same HDMI cable that sends video from your AVR to your TV. This allows your AVR to process the sound from your TV's built-in tuner and apps. TVs with an Enhanced Audio Return Channel or "eARC" port provide additional support for high bitrate multichannel audio (Dolby Atmos, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD and DTS:X). Please refer to your TV owner's manual for details about eARC support for your particular model.

* For 4K TVs, we recommend using an HDMI cable labeled "High Speed" and "with Ethernet" .
* For 8K TVs, we recommend using an HDMI cable labeled "Ultra High Speed".

AVR (Rear panel)

Turn on the TV
TV remote control

Select the appropriate HDMI

input on your TV

ES
HDMI

INPUT

TV/ VIDEO

TV remote control

Install batteries in the AVR remote control

Turn on the AVR
Press X on the remote control.

· Batteries can be taken out in reversed order.
9

Verify the connection
Verify that you can see this screen on your TV.

[1/7]
AV Receiver Setup Assistant

Please select a language...

English Français Español

If this screen is not displayed, please go back and retry the steps again in the recommended sequence.

Follow the on-screen Setup

Assistant

The TV is now connected to the AVR.

The Setup Assistant will walk you through connecting and

configuring your speakers and components to your Denon

AVR. Use the remote control and follow the instructions

on the TV screen to complete the AVR settings using the

Setup Assistant.

Setup Assistant Complete!
Setup is now complete. Your AVR is now properly configured to provide you with the best possible sound and video experience.
Enjoy!
Done

· In case the unit was already setup back in time the Setup Assistant won't start automatically and you only see the Denon logo on screen. In such case you can access the Setup Assistant by pressing SETUP on the remote control and selecting Setup Assistant from the menu.
10

Firmware update
If you see this screen after completing Setup Assistant, select Update Now to make sure your new AVR is up to date with the latest firmware and features.

The following features are available for your AVR.

Estimated time to install: Update Later

min Update Now

Download the mobile apps

Download both the "HEOS" app and the "Denon AVR Remote"

app for the full home entertainment experience. The HEOS app

is required to access online music through your AVR.

HEOS app The HEOS app allows you to explore, browse, and play music from many online streaming services or from your own music library.

Denon AVR Remote Control your new AVR with the latest Denon AVR Remote app.

Owner's manual
Refer to the online manual for other functions, information and operation procedure details. manuals.denon.com/AVRX6800H/NA/EN/
Online manual
For more information, visit www.denon.com
13

Trademark information

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by DEI Sales, Inc. is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

FR
The terms HDMI, HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, HDMI trade dress and the HDMI Logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc.
ES

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Atmos, Dolby Audio, Dolby Vision, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Confidential unpublished works. Copyright © 1992-2022 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS, Inc. DTS, DTS:X, and the DTS:X logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States and other countries. © 2021 DTS, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

App Store® is registered in the U.S. and other countries. Google Play and the Google Play logo are trademarks of Google LLC.

The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. Wi-Fi Certification provides assurance that the device has passed the interoperability test conducted by the Wi-Fi Alliance, a group that certifies interoperability among wireless LAN devices.
14

www.denon.com

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

AVR-X6800H
INTEGRATED NETWORK AV RECEIVER
Owner's Manual

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Accessories Inserting the batteries Operating range of the remote control unit
Features High quality sound High performance Easy operation
Part names and functions Front panel Display Rear panel Remote control unit

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

9 Connections

10 Speaker installation

11 Connecting speakers

Before connecting speakers

Connecting speakers to the speaker terminals

Connecting an external power amplifier

Speaker configuration and "Amp Assign" settings

Connecting 5.1-channel speakers

Connecting 7.1-channel speakers

Connecting 9.1-channel speakers

Connecting 11.1-channel speakers

Connecting 13.1-channel speakers

Bi-amp connection

Connecting 9.1-channel speakers: Second pair of front speakers 67

Connecting multi-zone speakers

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Connecting a TV

72 Playback

Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and

compatible with the ARC / eARC

73 Basic operation

Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and

Turning the power on

incompatible with the ARC / eARC

Selecting the input source

Connecting a playback device

Adjusting the volume

Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)

Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting)

Connecting a media player

Playback a Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player

Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player or DVD player

78 Playing a USB memory device

Connecting a game console or player device compatible with 8K 79

Playing files stored on USB memory devices

Connecting a turntable

80 Listening to music on a Bluetooth device

Connecting a USB memory device to the USB port

Playing music from Bluetooth device

Connecting FM/AM antennas

Pairing with other Bluetooth devices

Connecting to a home network (LAN)

Reconnecting to this unit from a Bluetooth device

Wired LAN

84 Listening to audio on Bluetooth headphones

100

Wireless LAN

Listening to audio on Bluetooth headphones

101

Connecting an external control device

Adjusting the volume of Bluetooth headphones

102

REMOTE CONTROL jacks

Reconnecting to a Bluetooth headphones

102

TRIGGER OUT jacks

Disconnecting Bluetooth headphones

103

Connecting the power cord

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Listening to FM/AM broadcasts Listening to FM/AM broadcasts Tuning in by entering the frequency (Direct Tune) Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode) Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto Preset Memory) Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset Memory) Listening to preset stations Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset Name) Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip) Cancelling Preset Skip
Listening to Internet Radio Listening to Internet Radio
Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS
Getting the HEOS App HEOS Account Playing from streaming music services Listening to the same music in multiple rooms

104 AirPlay function

127

105

Playing songs from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad

128

106

Playing iTunes music with this unit

128

107

Play a song from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad on multiple

synced devices (AirPlay 2)

129

107 Spotify Connect function

130

108

Playing Spotify music with this unit

130

108 Convenience functions

131

109

Playing back HEOS Favorites

132

110

Adding to HEOS Favorites

133

111

Deleting a HEOS Favorites

133

112

Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog Enhancer)

133

113

Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source

114

(Channel Level Adjust)

134

115

Adjusting the tone (Tone)

135

118

Selecting a Dirac Live filter (Dirac Live)

136

119

Adjusting audio delay (Audio Delay)

136

120

Changing the strength of Tactile Transducer according to the input source (Tactile Transducer)

137

123

Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video

Select)

138

Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)

139

Changing the speaker settings to match the listening environment

(Speaker Preset)

140

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Selecting a sound mode

141 Remote lock function

164

Selecting a sound mode

142

Disabling the sensor function of the remote control unit

164

Direct playback

143

Enabling the remote sensor function

164

Pure Direct playback

144 Web control function

165

Auto surround playback

144

Controlling the unit from a web control

165

Description of sound mode types

145 Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Another room)

167

Sound mode that can be selected for each input signal

150

Connecting ZONE

168

HDMI Control function

155

Playback the source in ZONE2/ZONE3

173

Setting procedure

155

Adjusting the Volume in ZONE2/ZONE3

177

Sleep timer function Using the sleep timer

156 157

Settings

Quick select plus function

158 Menu map

178

Calling up the settings

159

Menu operations

183

Changing the settings

160 Audio

184

Panel lock function

162

Subwoofer Level Adjust

184

Disabling all key button operations

162

Bass Sync

184

Disabling all button operations except VOLUME

163

Surround Parameter

185

Canceling the Panel lock function

163

Restorer

193

Volume

194

Audyssey®

195

Dirac Live

198

Graphic EQ

198

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Video HDMI Setup Output Settings On-Screen Display Screensaver 4K/8K Signal Format HDCP Setup
Inputs Input Assign Source Rename Hide Sources Source Level
Speakers Audyssey® Setup
Procedure for speaker settings (Audyssey® Setup) Error messages Retrieving Audyssey® Setup settings

200 Manual Setup

226

200

Speaker Layout

226

205

Amp Assign

226

206

Front/Center/Surround/Surround Back/Front Wide

228

207

Height Speakers

229

208

Layout

230

209

Front Layout / Middle Layout / Rear Layout / TS/CH

232

210

Subwoofers

235

210

Subwoofer Mode

236

213

Subwoofer Layout

236

213

Bi-Amp

239

214

Front B

239

215

ZONE2

240

215

ZONE3

240

217

ZONE2/3

241

223

View Terminal Config.

241

225

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents
Distances Levels Crossovers Speaker Preset Advanced Subwoofer Output Low Pass Filter Distribution Front Speaker 2ch Playback Tactile Transducer Dirac Live Setup Network Information Connection Wi-Fi Setup Settings Network Control Friendly Name Diagnostics AirPlay Spotify Connect Wi-Fi and Bluetooth

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

242 HEOS

261

243

You have not signed in

261

244

You have already signed in

261

244 General

262

245

Language

262

246

Owner's Manual

262

247

ECO

262

247

Bluetooth Transmitter

266

248

ZONE2 Setup / ZONE3 Setup

267

248

Zone Rename

269

251

Quick Select

270

252

Trigger Out 1 / Trigger Out 2 / Trigger Out 3

271

253

Front Display

271

253

Firmware

272

253

Information

274

254

Usage Data

276

256

Save & Load

276

257

Setup Lock

277

258

Reset

277

258 Specifying the zone used with the remote control unit

278

259

260

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Tips

Resetting factory settings

304

Resetting network settings

305

Tips

280 Factory Restore

306

Troubleshooting

282

Power does not turn on / Power is turned off

283 Appendix

Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit 284

Display on this unit shows nothing

284

No sound comes out

285

Desired sound does not come out

286

Sound is interrupted or noise occurs

290

No video is shown on the TV

291

The menu screen is not displayed on the TV

293

The color of the menu screen and operations content displayed

About HDMI Video conversion function Playing back a USB memory devices Playing back a Bluetooth device Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS Playing back Internet Radio Personal memory plus function

307 311 313 314 315 316 316

on the television is different from normal

293 Last function memory

316

AirPlay cannot be played back

294 Sound modes and channel output

317

USB memory devices cannot be played back

295 Sound modes and surround parameters

319

Bluetooth cannot be played back

296 Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes

322

The Internet radio cannot be played back

298 Explanation of terms

326

Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back

299 Trademark information

337

Various online services cannot be played

300 Specifications

341

The HDMI Control function does not work

300

Audio section

341

Cannot connect to a wireless LAN network

301

Video section

343

When using HDMI ZONE2, the devices does not function properly 302

Tuner section

344

Update error messages

303

Wireless LAN section

344

Bluetooth section

345

General

346

Index

348

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Thank you for purchasing this Denon product. To ensure proper operation, please read this owner's manual carefully before using the product. After reading this manual, be sure to keep it for future reference.
Accessories
Check that the following parts are supplied with the product.

Tips

Appendix

Quick Start Guide

Safety Instructions

Notes on radio

Warranty (for North America
model only)

Cable labels

Power cord

FM indoor antenna

AM loop antenna

Sound calibration microphone

Sound calibration microphone stand

Remote control unit (RC-1256)

2× R03/AAA batteries

External antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Inserting the batteries
1 Remove the rear lid in the direction of the arrow and remove it.

2 Insert two batteries correctly into the battery compartment as indicated. Batteries

Settings

Tips

Appendix

NOTE 0 To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid:
0 Do not use a new battery together with an old one. 0 Do not use two different types of batteries. 0 Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in use for long periods. 0 If the battery fluid should leak, carefully wipe the fluid off the inside of the battery compartment and insert new batteries.
Operating range of the remote control unit
Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it.

Approx. 23 ft/7 m

30° 30°

3 Put the rear cover back on.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Features

High quality sound
0 Powerful 11-channel Amplifier with the Latest Home Cinema Specs Featuring a sophisticated power amplifier design, this unit delivers highpower performance at 140 watts per channel (8 /ohms, 20 Hz - 20 kHz, T.H.D.: 0.05 %, 2ch. driven) to ensure a dynamic and precise entertainment experience. Low impedance drivers provide operational stability for a wide range of speakers and create a balanced, tonal sound.
0 Discrete 4 subwoofers Immerse yourself in evenly distributed, accurate bass. Featuring up to four subwoofer outputs to smooth out low frequencies and provide better dispersion. No audible peaks or dips - just powerful, room-filling bass.
0 Dolby Atmos (v p. 328) This unit is equipped with a decoder that supports Dolby Atmos audio format. The placement or movement of sound is accurately reproduced by the addition of overhead speakers, enabling you to experience an incredibly natural and realistic surround sound field.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 Speaker Virtualizer (v p. 187) Speaker Virtualizer enables you to access a more immersive entertainment experience from traditional channel based speaker layouts through digital signal processing including Dolby Atmos height virtualization and surround virtualization.
0 Speaker Virtualizer is not for use when both height speakers and surround speakers are connected.
0 Height Virtualization may be applied when surround speakers are connected.
0 DTS:X (v p. 331) This unit is equipped with the DTS:X decoder technology. DTS:X brings the home theater experience to new heights with its immersive object based audio technology which removes the bounds of channels. The flexibility of objects allows for sound to be scaled large or small and moved around the room with greater accuracy than ever before leading to a richer immersive audio experience.
0 DTS Virtual:X (v p. 331) DTS Virtual:X technology features DTS's proprietary virtual height and virtual surround processing to deliver an immersive sound experience from any type of input source (stereo to 7.1.4 channel) and speaker configuration.
0 DTS Virtual:X is not for use when Height speakers are connected.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

0 IMAX Enhanced (v p. 331)
This IMAX Enhanced product have met stringent performance standards established by IMAX and DTS in order to create a consistent and higher bar for sound performance. DTS has developed a special method for reproducing an IMAX signature sound experience in the consumer's home. This method combines a unique conversion process for IMAX theatrical audio mixes utilizing an enhanced DTS codec technology. The IMAX theatrical audio format with point source surround speakers closely matches the speaker configuration most consumers have in their homes today. Coupled with DTS audio technology, IMAX Enhanced audio products will ensure the best and most accurate audio reproduction over 5.1 or more speaker channels.
0 Audyssey LFCTM (Low Frequency Containment) (v p. 197)
Audyssey LFCTM solves the problem of low frequency sounds disturbing people in neighboring rooms or apartments. Audyssey LFCTM dynamically monitors the audio content and removes the low frequencies that pass through walls, floors and ceilings. It then applies psychoacoustic processing to restore the perception of low bass for listeners in the room. The result is great sound that no longer disturbs the neighbors.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 Discrete subwoofers and Audyssey Sub EQ HTTM (v p. 216)
The unit has four subwoofer output capability and can adjust the level and delay for each subwoofer individually. Audyssey Sub EQ HTTM makes the integration seamless by first compensating for any level and delay differences between the four subwoofers and then applying Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 to four subwoofers together for improved deep bass response and detail.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

0 Dirac Live Upgradability
The interaction between your sound system and the physical layout of your room has a huge impact on sound quality. Dirac Live® Room Correction applies state-of-the-art, patented algorithms to analyze and digitally reduce room impact and enhance speaker performance. Dirac Live delivers a larger sweet spot, accurate staging, clarity, voice intelligibility, and a deeper, tighter bass not otherwise possible. Fully tunable to your preference. You can purchase a Dirac Live license key to unlock the functionality. Visit www.dirac.com/denon/
0 Dirac Live Bass Control Upgradability
Dirac Live Bass Control is a technology to manage low-frequency channel routing from the signal to the playback channels (speakers) of your audio device. Additionally, with full control over the device's channel and frequency routing and output, the Dirac Live Room Correction technology is significantly augmented. In particular systems with multiple subwoofers will see a substantially improved room correction and bass performance.
For details, please refer to Dirac Live Manual.
https://manuals.denon.com/DiracLive/ALL/EN

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 AURO-3D
This unit is equipped with an AURO-3D decoder. With AURO-3D, Front Height (FHL + FHR), Surround Height (SHL + SHR) and Top Surround (TS/optional) are added to a conventional 5.1-channel system to achieve a natural and realistic sound field that is three-dimensional and fully immersive.

You will be able to fully enjoy AURO-3D playback if you properly place the speakers for AURO-3D.

2 AURO-3D playback
TS

SHL SL

FHL
FL SW

FHR
FR C

SHR SR

0 AURO-3D recommends adding FRONT HEIGHT and SURROUND HEIGHT speakers to a 5.1 speaker configuration. Optionally, you may substitute REAR HEIGHT, ceiling speakers, Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers instead of FRONT HEIGHT and SURROUND HEIGHT speakers for Dolby Atmos, DTS:X and AURO-3D playback.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

High performance

0 8K 60Hz input/output supported

8K, 4K 120Hz

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 Digital video processor upscales 1080p / 4K to 8K

1080p/4K 60Hz

8K up scaling

8K Ultra HD

When 8K Ultra HD (High Definition) is used, an input/output speed of 60 frames per second (60p) is achieved for video signals. When connected to 8K Ultra HD and 60p video signal input compatible TV, you can enjoy the sense of realism only available from high-definition images, even when viewing fast-moving video. This unit supports a wide range of HDR content, delivering even higher definition video.
0 HDCP 2.3 This unit is compatible with HDCP 2.3 copyright protection standard.

This unit is equipped with a 8K video upscaling function that allows 1080p/4K video to be output via HDMI at 8K (7680 × 4320 pixels) resolution. This function enables the device to be connected to a TV using a single HDMI cable, and produces high definition images for any video source.
0 eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) function compatibility The eARC function is compatible with conventional ARC functioncompatible audio formats in addition to multichannel linear PCM, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS-HD, DTS:X and other audio formats a conventional ARC function cannot transmit. Additionally, connecting to an eARC function-compatible television enables enjoyment of higher-quality surround playback of the audio content played from your television.
0 Equipped with HDMI ZONE2 output (v p. 167) The ZONE2 multi-room output includes an HDMI output that lets you enjoy a different A/V source in that room, with another program playing in the main room.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

0 HDMI connections enable connection to various digital AV devices (7 inputs, 3 outputs)
73
In Out

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 The device is equipped with a AirPlay® function in addition to network functions such as Internet radio etc. (v p. 127)

For connection to a broad range of digital sources, this unit features 7 HDMI inputs, that lets you quickly and conveniently connect a camcorder, game console or other HDMI-equipped device. There are dual HDMI outputs for the main room, and a third HDMI output for ZONE2.

You can enjoy a wide variety of content, including listening to Internet Radio, playing audio files stored on your PC. This unit also supports Apple AirPlay which lets you stream your music library from an iPhone®, iPad®, iPod touch® or iTunes®.
0 Supports AirPlay 2® wireless audio Sync multiple AirPlay 2 compatible devices/speakers for simultaneous playback. This unit supports AirPlay 2 and requires iOS 11.4 or later.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

0 Playback of DSD and FLAC files via USB and networks This unit supports the playback of high resolution audio formats such as DSD (5.6 MHz) and FLAC 192 kHz files. It provides high quality playback of high resolution files.
0 Wireless connection with Bluetooth devices can be carried out easily (v p. 96)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 Connect Bluetooth headphones
This unit can transmit Bluetooth so you can enjoy audio wirelessly through your Bluetooth headphones.
Playback can be performed using connected speakers and Bluetooth headphones simultaneously, or only using Bluetooth headphones.

You can enjoy music simply by connecting wirelessly with your smartphone, tablet, PC, etc.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

0 Multi-Room audio (v p. 139) MAIN ZONE

ZONE2ZONE3

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 Compatible with the "Denon AVR Remote" Appz for performing basic operations of the unit with an iPad, iPhone or AndroidTM devices (Google, Amazon Kindle Fire)

You can select and play back the respective inputs in MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3. In addition, when the All Zone Stereo function is used, the music being played back in MAIN ZONE can be enjoyed in all the zones at the same time. This is useful when you want to let the background music propagate throughout the whole house.
0 Energy-saving design
This unit is equipped with an ECO Mode function that allows you to enjoy music and movies while reducing the power consumption during use, and also an auto-standby function that automatically turns off the power supply when the unit is not in use. This helps reduce unnecessary power use.

The Denon AVR Remote app gives you full control of this unit as well as access to its setup menu for detailed adjustments from your phones or tablets. "Denon AVR Remote" App also gives you quick access to the receiver's status display, option menus, Denon Blu-ray Disc player control, and online owner's manual for your convenience.
z Download the appropriate "Denon AVR Remote" App for your iOS or Android devices. This unit needs to be connected to the same LAN or Wi-Fi (wireless LAN) network that the iPad, iPhone or AndroidTM is connected to.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

0 HEOS provides streaming music from your favorite online music sources

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Easy operation
0 "Setup Assistant" provides easy-to-follow setup instructions First select the language when prompted. Then simply follow the instructions displayed on the TV screen to set up the speakers, network, etc.
0 Easy to use Graphical User Interface This unit is equipped with a Graphical User Interface for improved operability.

HEOS wireless multi-room sound system that enables you to enjoy your favorite music anywhere and everywhere around your home. By utilizing your existing home network and the HEOS App (available for iOS, Android and Amazon devices), you can explore, browse, and play music from your own music library or from many online streaming music services.
When multiple products with HEOS Built-in are connected to the same network, they can be grouped to play the same music on all products simultaneously, or different music can be played on each one.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Part names and functions

Front panel

Settings

Tips

Appendix

For details, see the next page.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

q w er

u
A Power operation button (X) Used to turn the power of the MAIN ZONE (room where this unit is located) on/off (standby). (v p. 90)
B Power indicator This is lit as follows according to the power status: 0 White: Power on 0 Off: Normal standby 0 Red: 0 When "HDMI Pass Through" is set to "On" (v p. 200) 0 When "HDMI Control" is set to "On" (v p. 202) 0 When "Network Control" is set to "Always On" (v p. 257)

C SOURCE SELECT knob This selects the input source. (v p. 90)
D Remote control sensor This receives signals from the remote control unit. (v p. 10)
E Display This displays various pieces of information. (v p. 24)
F MASTER VOLUME knob This adjusts the volume level. (v p. 91)
G Door When you are using buttons and/or connectors behind the door, press the bottom of the door to open it. Be careful not to catch your fingers when closing the door.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

With the door open
qw e r t y u i o

Playback Q0

A ZONE2 ON/OFF button This turns the power of ZONE2 (another room) on/off. (v p. 173)
B ZONE2 SOURCE button This selects the input source for ZONE2. (v p. 173)
C ZONE3 ON/OFF button This turns the power of ZONE3 (another room) on/off. (v p. 173)
D ZONE3 SOURCE button This selects the input source for ZONE3. (v p. 173)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

E STATUS button Each press of this switches the status information that is shown on the display.
F Information button (INFO) This displays the status information on the TV screen. (v p. 275)
G Cursor buttons These select items.
H OPTION button This displays the option menu on the TV screen.
I DIMMER button Each press of this switches the brightness of the display. (v p. 271)
J QUICK SELECT buttons With a single press of any of these buttons, you can call up various settings you've registered to each button such as the input source, volume level and sound mode settings. (v p. 158)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Q1 Q2

Q3 Q4

Q5 Q6

K USB port (T)
This is used to connect USB storages (such as USB memory devices). (v p. 81)

L BACK button This returns to the previous screen.
M ENTER button This determines the selection.
N SETUP button This displays the menu on the TV screen. (v p. 183)
O SETUP MIC jack This is used to connect the supplied Sound calibration microphone. (v p. 218)
P Headphones jack (PHONES) This is used to connect headphones. When the headphones are plugged into this jack, audio will no longer be output from the connected speakers or from the PRE OUT connectors.
NOTE 0 To prevent hearing loss, do not raise the volume level excessively when using
headphones.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents
Display

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

r ty

ui o

Appendix

Q0
A Input signal indicators These light according to the audio input mode settings of each input source. (v p. 212)
B Decoder indicators These light when Dolby or DTS signals are input or when the Dolby or DTS decoder is running.
C Audyssey® indicator This lights when "MultEQ® XT32", "Dynamic EQ", "Dynamic Volume" or "Audyssey LFCTM" has been set up. (v p. 195)

Q1 Q2
D Tuner reception mode indicators These light up according to the reception conditions when the input source is set to "Tuner". TUNED: Lights up when the broadcast is properly tuned in. STEREO: Lights up when receiving FM stereo broadcasts.
E HDMI output indicator These light according to the HDMI output setting. When set to "Auto(Dual)", the indicators light according to connection status.
F MULTI ZONE indicator This lights up when ZONE2 or ZONE3 (another room) power is turned on. (v p. 175)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback ui o

Q1 Q2

G Sleep timer indicator This lights when the sleep mode is selected. (v p. 156)
H MUTE indicator This blinks while the sound is muted. (v p. 91)
I Volume indicator
J Information display The input source name, sound mode, setting values and other information are displayed here.
K Front speaker indicator This lights according to the setting of the front A and B speakers.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

L Input/output signal channel indicators
The channel for input/output signals is displayed according to the setting configured for "Channel Indicator". (v p. 271)
0 When "Channel Indicator" is set to "Output" (Default) These light when audio signals are being output from the speakers.
0 When "Channel Indicator" is set to "Input" These light corresponding to the channels that include the input signals.
When playing HD Audio sources, the A indicator lights when a signal from an extension channel (a channel other than the front, center, surround, surround back, front height, front wide or LFE channel) is input.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Rear panel
q w ert

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

u io

q Q0

Q1 t

For details, see the next page.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents q w ert

Connections

Playback q

Settings

Tips

Appendix

B Digital audio connectors (DIGITAL AUDIO) Used to connect devices equipped with digital audio connectors. 0 "Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC / eARC" (v p. 74) 0 "Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)" (v p. 76) 0 "Connecting a media player" (v p. 77)
C USB port (POWER SUPPLY) Can be used to power streaming media players, etc.

t
A Bluetooth/wireless LAN antenna connectors Used to connect the included external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity when connecting to a network via wireless LAN, or when connecting to a handheld device via Bluetooth. (v p. 85)
A Place the external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity evenly over the screw terminal of rear.
B Turn clockwise until the antennas is fully connected. C Rotate the antenna upwards for best reception.

0 Use a device's supplied AC adapter when a power supply of 5 V/1.5 A or more is required.
0 Connect to the USB port on the front panel to play content from a USB memory device.
D NETWORK connector Used to connect to a LAN cable when connecting to a wired LAN network. (v p. 84)
E Analog audio connectors (AUDIO) Used to connect devices equipped with analog audio connectors. 0 "Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)" (v p. 76) 0 "Connecting a media player" (v p. 77) 0 "Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player or DVD player" (v p. 78) 0 "Connecting a turntable" (v p. 80)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

u i o Q0

F HDMI connectors
Used to connect devices equipped with HDMI connectors.
0 "Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC / eARC" (v p. 73)
0 "Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC / eARC" (v p. 74)
0 "Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)" (v p. 76) 0 "Connecting a media player" (v p. 77) 0 "Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player or DVD player" (v p. 78)
0 "Connecting a game console or player device compatible with 8K" (v p. 79)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

G PRE OUT connectors Used to connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier or an external power amplifier. 0 "Connecting the subwoofer" (v p. 41) 0 "Connecting an external power amplifier" (v p. 45) 0 "Connecting 13.1-channel speakers" (v p. 62) 0 "Connecting ZONE" (v p. 168)
H Video connectors (VIDEO) Used to connect devices equipped with video connectors. 0 "Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)" (v p. 76) 0 "Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player or DVD player" (v p. 78)
I Component video connectors (COMPONENT VIDEO) Used to connect devices equipped with component video connectors. 0 "Connecting a media player" (v p. 77)
J AC inlet (AC IN) Used to connect the power cord. (v p. 88)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6
K FM/AM antenna terminals (ANTENNA) Used to connect FM antennas and AM loop antennas. (v p. 82)
L SIGNAL GND terminal Used to connect a ground wire for the turntable. (v p. 80)
M TRIGGER OUT jacks Used to connect devices equipped with the trigger function. (v p. 87)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

N REMOTE CONTROL jacks Used to connect infrared receivers/transmitters in order to operate this unit and external devices from a different room. (v p. 86)
O RS-232C connector Used to connect home automation controller devices fitted with RS-232C connectors. Consult the owner's manual of the home automation controller for more information about serial control of this unit. Perform the operation below beforehand.
A Turn on the power of this unit. B Turn off the power of this unit from the external controller. C Check that the unit is in the standby mode.
P Speaker terminals (SPEAKERS) Used to connect speakers. (v p. 40)
NOTE 0 Do not touch the inner pins of the connectors on the rear panel. Electrostatic
discharge may cause permanent damage to the unit.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Remote control unit

q w

e
r
t y

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

A ZONE SELECT buttons These switch the zone (MAIN ZONE, ZONE2, ZONE3) that is operated through the remote control unit. 0 "Playing different sources in MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3" (v p. 175) 0 "Menu operations" (v p. 183)
B Input source select buttons These selects the input source. 0 "Selecting the input source" (v p. 90) 0 "Playing different sources in MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3" (v p. 175)
C Channel/page search buttons (CH/PAGE df) These select radio stations registered to presets or switch pages. (v p. 108)
D MUTE button (:) This mutes the output audio. 0 "Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting)" (v p. 91) 0 "Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting)" (v p. 177)
E Information button (INFO) This displays the status information on the TV screen. (v p. 275)
F Cursor buttons These select items.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

G BACK button This returns to the previous screen.
H System buttons These perform playback related operations. Tuning up / Tuning down buttons (TUNE +, ) These select either FM broadcast or AM broadcast. (v p. 105)
I HDMI OUT button This sets the HDMI monitor output. (v p. 205)
J QUICK SELECT buttons (1 4) These call up settings registered to each button, such as input source, volume level and sound mode settings. (v p. 158)
K SOUND MODE buttons These select the sound mode. (v p. 141)
L Remote control signal transmitter This transmits signals from the remote control unit. (v p. 10)

u i o
Q0
Q1

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Q4 Q5 Q6
Q7
Q8

Settings

Tips

Appendix

M POWER button (X) This turns the power on/off. 0 "Turning the power on" (v p. 90) 0 "Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Another room)" (v p. 167)
N VOLUME buttons (df) These adjusts the volume level. 0 "Adjusting the volume" (v p. 91) 0 "Adjusting the Volume in ZONE2/ZONE3" (v p. 177)
O OPTION button This displays the option menu on the TV screen.
P ENTER button This determines the selection.
Q SETUP button This displays the menu on the TV screen. (v p. 183)
R SLEEP button This sets the sleep timer. (v p. 156)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

o Contents
Speaker installation Connecting speakers Connecting a TV Connecting a playback device Connecting a USB memory device to the USB port Connecting FM/AM antennas Connecting to a home network (LAN) Connecting an external control device Connecting the power cord

Playback
34 40 72 75 81 82 84 86 88

NOTE
0 Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been completed. However, when the "Setup Assistant" is running, follow the instructions in the "Setup Assistant" (page 9 in the separate "Quick Start Guide") screen for making connections. (During "Setup Assistant" operation, the input/output connectors do not conduct current.)
0 Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing so can result in noise.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Cables used for connections
Provide necessary cables according to the devices you want to connect.

Speaker cable

Subwoofer cable HDMI cable

Component video cable

Video cable Coaxial digital cable Optical cable

Audio cable LAN cable

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Speaker installation
Determine the speaker system depending on the number of speakers you are using and install each speaker and subwoofer in the room. Speaker installation is explained using this example of a typical installation.

FL SL
SW1

SW2

SBL

SW3

SW4

SBR

FL/FR (Front speaker left/ right):
C (Center speaker):

Place the FRONT left and right speakers an equal distance from the main listening position. The distance between each speaker and your TV should also be the same.
Place the CENTER speaker in between the front speakers and above or below your TV.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Place the SURROUND left and right speakers an

SL/SR

equal distance to the left and right sides of the

(Surround speaker left/ main listening position. If you don't have

right):

surround back speakers, move the surround

speakers slightly behind your listening position.

SBL/SBR (Surround back speaker left/right):

Place the SURROUND BACK left and right speakers an equal distance from the main listening position and directly behind the main listening position. When using a single surround back speaker (SB), place it directly behind the listening position.

SW 1/2/3/4 (Subwoofer):

Place your subwoofer near your front speakers. If you are using multiple subwoofers, place pairs of subwoofers spaced equally across the front or rear walls of the room or place single subs midway between the front pairs or rear pairs. You can also set a specific layout when using multiple subwoofers on the "Subwoofer Mode" setting (v p. 236): 2 subwoofers: 2 front, or 1 front and 1 rear 3 subwoofers: 2 front and 1rear 4 subwoofers: 2 front and 2 rear

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

TRL

TML

RHL

TFL

FHL

TRR TMR TFR
FHR

RHR

Settings

Tips

Appendix

FHL/FHR (Front height left/right):

speaker

Place the FRONT HEIGHT left and right speakers directly above the front speakers. Mount them as close to the ceiling as possible and aim them towards the main listening position.

TFL/TFR (Top front speaker left/right):

Mount the TOP FRONT left and right speakers on the ceiling slightly in front of your main listening position and aligned with the left and right front speakers.

TML/TMR

Mount the TOP MIDDLE left and right speakers

(Top middle speaker directly above the main listening position and

left/right):

aligned with the left and right front speakers.

TRL/TRR (Top rear speaker left/right):

Mount the TOP REAR left and right speakers on the ceiling slightly behind your main listening position and aligned with the left and right front speakers.

RHL/RHR (Rear height speaker left/right):

Place the REAR HEIGHT left and right speakers directly behind the main listening position. Mount them as close to the ceiling as possible and aligned with the left and right front speakers.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents
SHL

Connections
TS CH

Playback
SHR

Settings

Tips

Appendix

SHL/SHR (Surround height speaker left/right):
CH (Center height speaker):
TS (Top surround speaker):

Place the SURROUND HEIGHT left and right speakers directly above the surround speakers.
Place the CENTER HEIGHT speaker directly above the center speaker. Mount them as close to the ceiling as possible and aim them towards the main listening position.
Place the TOP SURROUND speaker directly above the main listening position and aligned with the center channel speaker.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

FDL SDL
BDL

FDR SDR
BDR

Settings

Tips

Appendix

About Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers
Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers reflect the sound off the ceiling to allow the sound to come from over your head by using a special upwardpointing speaker that is placed on the floor.
You can enjoy the Dolby Atmos 3D sound even in an environment where speakers cannot be installed on the ceiling.

Place the FRONT Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker

FDL/FDR

on the front speaker. For a Dolby Atmos Enabled

(Front Dolby speaker integrated with a front speaker, place the Dolby

left/right):

Atmos Enabled speaker instead of the front

speaker.

SDL/SDR (Surround Dolby speaker left/right):

Place the SURROUND Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker on the surround speaker. For a Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker integrated with a surround speaker, place the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker instead of the surround speaker.

Place the BACK Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker on

BDL/BDR

the surround back speaker. For a Dolby Atmos

(Back Dolby speaker Enabled speaker integrated with a surround back

left/right):

speaker, place the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker

instead of the surround back speaker.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

0 This unit is compatible with Dolby Atmos and DTS:X which offers an even wider and deeper surround sensation.
0 The "Speaker Virtualizer" must be set to "On" for Dolby Atmos playback with 5.1channel speaker configurations or less. (v p. 187)
0 IMAX DTS:X / DTS:X can be selected regardless of the speaker configuration.
0 AURO-3D recommends adding FRONT HEIGHT and SURROUND HEIGHT speakers to a 5.1 speaker configuration. Optionally, you may substitute REAR HEIGHT, ceiling speakers, Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers instead of FRONT HEIGHT and SURROUND HEIGHT speakers for Dolby Atmos, DTS:X and AURO-3D playback.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Recommended placement of the speakers
Floor speakers Layout 0 Use the following illustration as a guide for the installation location of
each floor speaker. You do not have to match them exactly.

SW C z1

z3 z2

SBL

SBR

z1 22° - 30° z2 90° - 110° z3 135° - 150°

0 If you are not using the surround back speakers, the recommended angle of the surround sound speakers (z2) is 120°.
0 When using a single surround back speaker, place it directly behind the listening position.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Height speakers Layout 0 Use the following illustration as a guide for the installation location of each height speaker. You do not have to match them exactly.

Top middle / Top surround speaker Surround height speaker

Top front speaker

Top rear speaker

Front height / Center height speaker
Point slightly downwards
Front speaker

z4 z5 z3 z2

Rear height speaker
Point slightly downwards
Surround back speaker

GViewed from the sideH

Surround speaker

z1 30° - 45° z4 125° - 150°

z2 30° - 55° z5 135° - 150°

z3 65° - 100°

FHL CH FHR

TFL

TFR

TML

TMR

SHL

TRL TRR

SHR

RHL

RHR

GViewed from the topH

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Connecting speakers
Here we connect the speakers in the room to this unit.

Before connecting speakers

NOTE
0 Disconnect this unit's power plug from the power outlet before connecting the speakers. Also, turn off the subwoofer.
0 Connect so that the speaker cable core wires do not protrude from the speaker terminal. The protection circuit may be activated if the core wires touch the rear panel or if the + and - sides touch each other. ("Protection circuit" (v p. 336))
0 Never touch the speaker terminals while the power cord is connected. Doing so could result in electric shock. When the "Setup Assistant" (page 9 in the separate "Quick Start Guide") is running, follow the instructions in the "Setup Assistant" screen for making connections. (Power is not supplied to the speaker terminals while the "Setup Assistant" is running.)
0 Use speakers with an impedance of 4 16 /ohms.
0 When connecting speakers with different impedances, set the impedance based on the speaker with the lowest impedance.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

NOTE
0 Carry out the following settings when using a speaker with an impedance of 4 6 /ohms.
1. Press and hold the main unit's STATUS and ZONE3 SOURCE at the same time for at least 3 seconds. "z4K/8K Format <Enhanced>" appears on the display.
2. Press Cursor Down on the main unit twice. "zSp. Impedance <8ohms>" appears on the display.
3. Use Cursor Left or Cursor Right on the main unit to select the impedance.

8ohms (Default):

Select when the impedance for all of the connected speakers is 8 /ohms or over.

6ohms:

Select when the impedance for any of the connected speakers is 6 /ohms.

4ohms:

Select when the impedance for any of the connected speakers is 4 /ohms.

4. Press the main unit's ENTER to complete the setting.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Connecting the speaker cables
Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and + (red) and (black) polarities on the speakers being connected to this unit, and be sure to connect the channels and polarities correctly.
1 Peel off about 3/8 inch (10 mm) of sheathing from the tip of the speaker cable, then either twist the core wire tightly or terminate it.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Connecting the subwoofer
Use a subwoofer cable to connect the subwoofer. Four subwoofers can be connected to this unit. When you are connecting multiple subwoofers, change the setting of "Subwoofers" in the "Speaker Layout" setting according to the number of subwoofers to be connected. (v p. 235) The level and distance can be set separately for Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2, Subwoofer 3 and Subwoofer 4.

SW1

SW2

2 Turn the speaker terminal counterclockwise to loosen it.

3 Insert the speaker cable's core wire to the hilt into the speaker terminal.

4 Turn the speaker terminal clockwise to tighten it.

SW3

SW4

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

o About the cable labels (supplied) for channel identification
The channel display section for speaker terminals on the rear panel is color-coded for each channel to be identifiable. Attach the cable label corresponding to each speaker to each speaker cable. This makes it easy to connect the correct cable to the speaker terminals on the rear panel.

Speaker FRONT L FRONT R CENTER SURROUND L SURROUND R SURROUND BACK L SURROUND BACK R FRONT WIDE L FRONT WIDE R FRONT HEIGHT L FRONT HEIGHT R TOP FRONT L TOP FRONT R TOP MIDDLE L TOP MIDDLE R TOP REAR L TOP REAR R

Color White Red Green Light Blue Blue Beige Brown Pink Magenta Light Yellow Yellow Light Yellow Yellow Pink Magenta Light Purple Purple

Speaker SURROUND HEIGHT L SURROUND HEIGHT R REAR HEIGHT L REAR HEIGHT R TOP SURROUND CENTER HEIGHT FRONT DOLBY L FRONT DOLBY R SURROUND DOLBY L SURROUND DOLBY R BACK DOLBY L BACK DOLBY R SUBWOOFER 1 SUBWOOFER 2 SUBWOOFER 3 SUBWOOFER 4

Appendix
Color Light Purple
Purple Light Purple
Purple Pink Magenta Light Yellow Yellow Pink Magenta Light Purple Purple Black Black Black Black

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

The supplied cable labels include labels for the speaker and HDMI cables. Attach a cable label to each cable that matches the speakers and HDMI devices being connected, as shown below. This makes it easy to identify and properly connect the cables between your components.
G How to attach the cable labels H

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Connecting speakers to the speaker terminals
You can connect 13.4 channel speakers to this unit. The speaker terminals can perform simultaneous playback for up to 11 channels. Use in combination with pre-out terminals if you wish to perform simultaneous playback for 13 channels. Refer to "Speaker Layout" for details. (v p. 226) Connect each speaker according to the speakers you are using.
TMR TML z2, z3 z2, z3

SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1

FWR FWL z2 z2

z1 When using a single surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L terminal.

z2 The 3rd set of height speakers can be connected to the HEIGHT3/ FRONT WIDE speaker connectors instead of the Front Wide channel.

z3 The output terminals for Height/Ceiling/Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers vary according to the speaker combination that you use. For the speaker terminal that connects each Height/Ceiling/Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker, refer to "Speaker Layout" "Layout" (v p. 230).

SR SL SBR SBL FHR FHL RHR RHL

z3 z3

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Connecting an external power amplifier
You can use this unit as a preamplifier by connecting an external power amplifier to the PRE OUT connectors. By adding a power amplifier to each channel, the realness of the sound can be further enhanced. Select the terminal to use and connect the device.

FRONT LR

Power amplifier

CENTER

AUDIO

SURROUND SURROUND BACK

HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2 FRONT WIDE

Subwoofer (Primary)
AUDIO
SUBWOOFER
1

Subwoofer
AUDIO
SUBWOOFER
2

Subwoofer
AUDIO
SUBWOOFER
3

Subwoofer
AUDIO
SUBWOOFER
4

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 Set "Amp Assign" to "Preamplifier" if connecting all channels to the Pre-out connectors using an external amplifier. (v p. 227) This stops operation of the internal power amplifier of this unit, reducing interference in the preamplifier created by the power amplifier.
0 You can use the "Connection" setting in the Speaker Layout Menu to disconnect the built-in power circuit of each channel individually and use just your favorite channel as the Preamplifier. (v p. 226)
0 When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the left channel (L) terminal.
0 The output signal for the PRE OUT connector of Height1, Height2 and Height3/Front Wide vary depending on the combination of the Height/Ceiling/Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers that you are using. For the PRE OUT connector that connects each Height/Ceiling/Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker, refer to "Speaker Layout" - "Layout" or "Front Layout / Middle Layout / Rear Layout / TS/CH" (v p. 232).

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Speaker configuration and "Amp Assign" settings

This unit has a built-in 11-channel power amplifier. In addition to the basic 5.1-channel system, a variety of speaker systems can be configured by changing the "Speaker Layout" settings to suit the application, such as 7.1-channel systems, bi-amp connections and 2-channel systems for multi-zone playback. (v p. 226)
Perform "Speaker Layout" settings to suit the number of rooms and speaker configuration to be installed. (v p. 226)

Playback speaker in each zone

MAIN ZONE

ZONE2

ZONE3

"Amp Assign" settings

Connection page

5.1-channel playback 7.1-channel playback

Can be set in all "Amp

Assign" settings.

9.1-channel playback

9.1ch + ZONE2 (Default)

11.1-channel playback

11.1ch

13.1-channel playback

2-channel (Pre-out) 2-channel (Pre-out) 13.1ch

9.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers)

9.1ch (Bi-Amp)

5.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front, center and surround speakers)

5.1ch Full Bi-Amp

Second front speakers

9.1ch + Front B

9.1-channel playback

2-channel (Speaker out)

2-channel (Pre-out) 9.1ch + ZONE2 (Default)

9.1-channel playback

2-channel (Pre-out)

2-channel (Speaker out)

9.1ch + ZONE3

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playback speaker in each zone

MAIN ZONE

ZONE2

ZONE3

"Amp Assign" settings

7.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers)

2-channel (Speaker out)

2-channel (Pre-out) 7.1ch (Bi-Amp) + ZONE2

7.1-channel playback

2-channel (Speaker out)

7.1ch + ZONE2/3

9.1-channel playback

1-channel (Speaker out)

9.1ch + ZONE2/3-MONO

13.1-channel playback (using this unit as a preamplifier)

Not used

Preamplifier

The sound mode that can be selected varies according to the speaker configuration. The following pages provide basic connection examples.

Connection page 69
70
71
45

Refer to the example connection for "Example layout for AURO-3D 9.1 channel system" (v p. 56) when playing AURO-3D with a 9.1-channel system using the basic 5.1-channel system and the front height and surround height speakers. Also refer to the connection example for "Example layout for AURO-3D 13.1 channel system" (v p. 64) when playing AURO-3D with a 13.1channel system by adding the Surround Back, Center Height and Top Surround speakers.

0 In addition to the connections described in p. 49 - 71, this unit allows for various speaker connections with the "Speaker Layout" setting.
Also refer to the menu screen in "View Terminal Config." on the "Speaker Layout" setting screen, which shows how to make connections in your environment.

Speakers/Speaker Layout

SW 1 SW 2 HEIGHT3/ FRONT WIDE

Front

Center

Surround

Surround Back

Front Height

Rear Height

Top Middle

SW 3

SW 4

Top Middle

Front

Center

Back

Surround

Surround Back

Front Height

Rear Height

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Connecting 5.1-channel speakers
This serves as a basic 5.1-channel surround system.

SW C

For each speaker connection, refer to "Connecting speakers to the speaker terminals" (v p. 44) or "Connecting an external power amplifier" (v p. 45).
0 Set Speaker Layout in the menu as follows. (v p. 226) 1. Center: Yes 2. Surround: Yes 3. Subwoofers: 1 spkr

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Connecting 7.1-channel speakers
o Example layout when using surround back speakers
This 7.1-channel surround system is basic 7.1-channel system. (Adding surround back speakers to basic 5.1-channel system)

SW C

SBL

SBR

For each speaker connection, refer to the following. 0 "Connecting speakers to the speaker terminals" (v p. 44) 0 "Connecting an external power amplifier" (v p. 45)

0 Set Speaker Layout in the menu as follows. (v p. 226)
1. Center: Yes 2. Surround: Yes 3. Surround Back: 2 spkrs 4. Subwoofers: 1 spkr

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Example layout when using front wide speakers
This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with front wide speakers.

SW C FWL
SL

FWR SR

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Example layout when using height speakers

This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with front height speakers.

FHL

FHR

SW C

For each speaker connection, refer to the following. 0 "Connecting speakers to the speaker terminals" (v p. 44) 0 "Connecting an external power amplifier" (v p. 45)
0 Set Speaker Layout in the menu as follows. (v p. 226) 1. Center: Yes 2. Surround: Yes 3. Height Speakers: 2 spkrs 4. Layout: Front Heightz 5. Subwoofers: 1 spkr z The front height speakers can be changed to other height, ceiling or Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers in the "Speaker Layout" - "Layout" settings.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Connecting 9.1-channel speakers
o Example layout when using surround back and front wide speakers

SW C FWL
SL

FWR SR

SBL

SBR

For each speaker connection, refer to the following. 0 "Connecting speakers to the speaker terminals" (v p. 44) 0 "Connecting an external power amplifier" (v p. 45)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 Set Speaker Layout in the menu as follows. (v p. 226)
1. Center: Yes 2. Surround: Yes 3. Surround Back: 2 spkrs 4. Front Wide: Yes 5. Subwoofers: 1 spkr

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Example layout when using surround back and one set of height speakers

FHL

FHR

SBL

SBR

For each speaker connection, refer to the following. 0 "Connecting speakers to the speaker terminals" (v p. 44) 0 "Connecting an external power amplifier" (v p. 45)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 Set Speaker Layout in the menu as follows. (v p. 226)
1. Center: Yes 2. Surround: Yes 3. Surround Back: 2 spkrs 4. Height Speakers: 2 spkrs 5. Layout: Front Heightz 6. Subwoofers: 1 spkr
z The front height speakers can be changed to other height, ceiling or Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers in the "Speaker Layout" - "Layout" settings.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Example layout when using front wide and one set of height speakers

FHL

FHR

FWL FL

FR FWR

For each speaker connection, refer to the following. 0 "Connecting speakers to the speaker terminals" (v p. 44) 0 "Connecting an external power amplifier" (v p. 45)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 Set Speaker Layout in the menu as follows. (v p. 226)
1. Center: Yes 2. Surround: Yes 3. Front Wide: Yes 4. Height Speakers: 2 spkrs 5. Layout: Front Heightz 6. Subwoofers: 1 spkr
z The front height speakers can be changed to other height, ceiling or Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers in the "Speaker Layout" - "Layout" settings.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Example layout when using two sets of height speakers

RHL FHL

RHR FHR

For each speaker connection, refer to the following. 0 "Connecting speakers to the speaker terminals" (v p. 44) 0 "Connecting an external power amplifier" (v p. 45)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 Set Speaker Layout in the menu as follows. (v p. 226)
1. Center: Yes 2. Surround: Yes 3. Height Speakers: 4 spkrs 4. Front Layout: Front Heightz 5. Rear Layout: Rear Heightz 6. Subwoofers: 1 spkr
z The front height speakers and rear height speakers can be changed to other height, ceiling or Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers in the "Speaker Layout" "Layout" settings.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Example layout for AURO-3D 9.1 channel system
This speaker configuration is optimized for AURO-3D playback.

FHL

FHR

SHL

SHR

Tips

Appendix

0 Set Speaker Layout in the menu as follows. (v p. 226)
1. Center: Yes 2. Surround: Yes 3. Height Speakers: 4 spkrs 4. Front Layout: Front Height 5. Rear Layout: Surround Height 6. Subwoofers: 1 spkr

SW FR FL C SR SL

FHR FHL SHR SHL

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Connecting 11.1-channel speakers
o Example layout when using surround back, Front Wide and one set of height speakers

FHL

FHR

FWL FL

FR FWR

SBL

SBR

For each speaker connection, refer to the following. 0 "Connecting speakers to the speaker terminals" (v p. 44) 0 "Connecting an external power amplifier" (v p. 45)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 Set Speaker Layout in the menu as follows. (v p. 226)
1. Center: Yes 2. Surround: Yes 3. Surround Back: 2 spkrs 4. Front Wide: Yes 5. Height Speakers: 2 spkrs 6. Layout: Front Heightz 7. Subwoofers: 1 spkr
z The front height speakers can be changed to other height, ceiling or Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers in the "Speaker Layout" - "Layout" settings.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Example layout when using surround back and two sets of height speakers

RHL FHL

RHR FHR

SBL

SBR

For each speaker connection, refer to the following. 0 "Connecting speakers to the speaker terminals" (v p. 44) 0 "Connecting an external power amplifier" (v p. 45)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 Set Speaker Layout in the menu as follows. (v p. 226)
1. Center: Yes 2. Surround: Yes 3. Surround Back: 2 spkrs 4. Height Speakers: 4 spkrs 5. Front Layout: Front Heightz 6. Rear Layout: Rear Heightz 7. Subwoofers: 1 spkr
z The front height speakers and rear height speakers can be changed to other height, ceiling or Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers in the "Speaker Layout" "Layout" settings.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Example layout when using front wide and two sets of height speakers

RHL FHL

RHR FHR

FWL FL

FR FWR

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 Set Speaker Layout in the menu as follows. (v p. 226)
1. Center: Yes 2. Surround: Yes 3. Front Wide: Yes 4. Height Speakers: 4 spkrs 5. Front Layout: Front Heightz 6. Rear Layout: Rear Heightz 7. Subwoofers: 1 spkr
z The front height speakers and rear height speakers can be changed to other height, ceiling or Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers in the "Speaker Layout" "Layout" settings.

For each speaker connection, refer to the following. 0 "Connecting speakers to the speaker terminals" (v p. 44) 0 "Connecting an external power amplifier" (v p. 45)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Example layout when using three sets of height speakers

TML

RHL

FHL

TMR FHR

RHR

For each speaker connection, refer to the following. 0 "Connecting speakers to the speaker terminals" (v p. 44) 0 "Connecting an external power amplifier" (v p. 45)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 Set Speaker Layout in the menu as follows. (v p. 226)
1. Center: Yes 2. Surround: Yes 3. Height Speakers: 6 spkrs 4. Front Layout: Front Heightz 5. Middle Layout: Top Middlez 6. Rear Layout: Rear Heightz 7. Subwoofers: 1 spkr
z The front height speakers, top middle speakers and rear height speakers can be changed to other height, ceiling or Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers in the "Speaker Layout" - "Layout" settings.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Example layout for AURO-3D 11.1 channel system
This speaker configuration is optimized for AURO-3D playback.

SHL SL

FHL

FHR

FL SW

FR C

SHR SR

Tips

Appendix

CH TS

For each speaker connection, refer to the following. 0 "Connecting speakers to the speaker terminals" (v p. 44) 0 "Connecting an external power amplifier" (v p. 45)
0 Set Speaker Layout in the menu as follows. (v p. 226) 1. Center: Yes 2. Surround: Yes 3. Height Speakers: 6 spkrs 4. Front Layout: Front Height 5. Middle Layout: Surround Height 6. Rear Layout: No 7. TS/CH: TS/CH 8. Subwoofers: 1 spkr

SW FR FL C SR SL

FHR FHL SHR SHL

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Connecting 13.1-channel speakers
This system, which is based on a 5.1-channel system, plays back up to 13.1-channels at the same time.
o Example layout when using surround back, Front Wide and two set of height speakers

RHL FHL

RHR FHR

FR FL

FWL FL

FR FWR

FWR FWL

SBL

SBR

For each speaker connection, refer to the following. 0 "Connecting speakers to the speaker terminals" (v p. 44) 0 "Connecting an external power amplifier" (v p. 45)

0 Set Speaker Layout in the menu as follows. (v p. 226)
1. Center: Yes 2. Surround: Yes 3. Surround Back: 2 spkrs 4. Front Wide: Yes 5. Height Speakers: 4 spkrs 6. Front Layout: Front Height 7. Rear Layout: Rear Height 8. Subwoofers: 1 spkr

Power amplifier

C SR SL SBR SBL FHR FHL RHR RHL

0 When connecting 13.1 channel speakers, an external amplifier needs to be
connected to the Front channel or the Front Wide channel at minimum. Set "Connection" to "Pre-out Only" for your preferred channel. (v p. 226)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

o Example layout when using surround back and three sets of height speakers

Appendix

TML RHL
FHL

TMR FHR

RHR

FR FL

TMR TML

SBL

SBR

For each speaker connection, refer to the following. 0 "Connecting speakers to the speaker terminals" (v p. 44) 0 "Connecting an external power amplifier" (v p. 45)

Power amplifier

0 Set Speaker Layout in the menu as follows. (v p. 226)
1. Center: Yes 2. Surround: Yes 3. Surround Back: 2 spkrs 4. Height Speakers: 6 spkrs 5. Front Layout: Front Height 6. Middle Layout: Top Middle 7. Rear Layout: Rear Height 8. Subwoofers: 1 spkr

C SR SL SBR SBL FHR FHL RHR RHL

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

o Example layout for AURO-3D 13.1 channel system
This speaker configuration is optimized for AURO-3D playback.

FHL

FHR

SHL

SHR

FR FL

Tips

Appendix
CH TS

SBL

SBR

For each speaker connection, refer to the following. 0 "Connecting speakers to the speaker terminals" (v p. 44) 0 "Connecting an external power amplifier" (v p. 45)

Power amplifier

0 Set Speaker Layout in the menu as follows. (v p. 226)
1. Center: Yes 2. Surround: Yes 3. Surround Back: 2 spkrs 4. Height Speakers: 6 spkrs 5. Front Layout: Front Height 6. Middle Layout: Surround Height 7. Rear Layout: No 8. TS/CH: TS/CH 9. Subwoofers: 1 spkr

C SR SL SBR SBL FHR FHL RHR RHL

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Bi-amp connection
o 9.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers)
This system plays back 9.1-channels. You can use the bi-amp connection for front speakers. Bi-amp connection is a method to connect separate amplifiers to the tweeter terminal and woofer terminal of a speaker that supports bi-amplification. This connection enables back EMF (power returned without being output) from the woofer to flow into the tweeter without affecting the sound quality, producing a higher sound quality. You can connect speakers for up to 11-channels for MAIN ZONE. When you connect speakers for 10 or more channels, the output speakers automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.

FHL

FHR

FL (Bi-Amp)

FR (Bi-Amp)

SW C SL SBL

SR SBR

NOTE
0 When making bi-amp connections, be sure to remove the short-circuiting plate or wire between the speaker's woofer and tweeter terminals.

C SR SL SBR SBL FHRz FHLz

(R)

(L)

qw
FR

q w
FL

z The height speakers, ceiling speakers and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers can be connected to the HEIGHT1 speaker terminals. Set the speaker to be connected from "Speaker Layout" in the menu. (v p. 226)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

o 5.1-channel playback : Bi-amp connection of front, center and surround speakers
This system plays back 5.1-channels. You can use the bi-amp connection for all front, center and surround speakers.

Appendix

FL (Bi-Amp)

FR (Bi-Amp)

SW C (Bi-Amp)
SL (Bi-Amp)

SR (Bi-Amp)

(R)
q w
FR

(L)
qw
FL

q w
C

(R)
q w
SR

(L)
q w
SL

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Connecting 9.1-channel speakers: Second pair of front speakers
This system enables switching playback between front speakers A and B as desired.

FHL

FHR

FL FL (B) (A)

FR FR (A) (B)

SW C SL SBL

SR SBR

Appendix
FR FL (B) (B)

SW FR FL C SR SL SBR SBL FHRz FHLz (A) (A)
z The height speakers, ceiling speakers and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers can be connected to the HEIGHT1 speaker terminals. Set the speaker to be connected from "Speaker Layout" in the menu. (v p. 226)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Connecting multi-zone speakers

o 9.1-channel playback (MAIN ZONE) + 2-channel playback (ZONE2 or ZONE3)
This type of configuration plays back 9.1-channels in MAIN ZONE and 2-channels in ZONE2. (Speakers can output audio from ZONE3 instead of ZONE2 (Amp Assign: 9.1ch + ZONE3)).

MAIN ZONE

FHL

FHR

Appendix

ZONE2 ZONE2

SW C

SBL

SBR

ZONE2

ZONE2 L

ZONE2 R

SW FR FL C SR SL SBR SBL FHRz FHLz
z The height speakers, ceiling speakers and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers can be connected to the HEIGHT1 speaker terminals. Set the speaker to be connected from "Speaker Layout" in the menu. (v p. 226)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o 7.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers: MAIN ZONE) + 2-channel playback (ZONE2)
This type of configuration plays back 7.1-channels in MAIN ZONE and 2-channels in ZONE2. You can use the bi-amp connection for front speakers in MAIN ZONE.

MAIN ZONE

FL (Bi-Amp)

FR (Bi-Amp)

SW C

SBL

SBR

ZONE2

ZONE2 L

ZONE2 R

C SR SL SBR SBL

ZONE2 ZONE2

(R)

(L)

qw
FR

q w
FL

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o 7.1-channel playback (MAIN ZONE) + 2-channel playback (ZONE2) + 2-channel playback (ZONE3)
This type of configuration plays back 7.1-channels in MAIN ZONE and 2-channels in ZONE2 and ZONE3.

MAIN ZONE

SW C SL SBL ZONE2

SR
SBR ZONE3

ZONE2 L

ZONE2 R

ZONE3 L

ZONE3 R

SW FR FL

C SR SL SBR SBL

ZONE3 ZONE3

ZONE2 ZONE2

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o 9.1-channel playback (MAIN ZONE) + 1-channel playback (ZONE2) + 1-channel playback (ZONE3)
This type of configuration plays back 9.1-channels in MAIN ZONE and 1-channel (monaural) in ZONE2 and ZONE3.

MAIN ZONE

FHL

FHR

ZONE3 ZONE2 Mono Mono

SW C SL SBL ZONE2
ZONE2 Mono

SR
SBR ZONE3
ZONE3 Mono

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Connecting a TV
Connect a TV to this unit so that the input video is output to the TV. You can also enjoy audio from the TV on this unit. How to connect a TV depends on the connectors and functions equipped on the TV.

Appendix

Is the TV equipped with an HDMI connector? Yes

Is the TV compatible with the ARC / eARC?z

Yes

"Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI
connector and compatible with the ARC / eARC" (v p. 73)

"Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI
connector and incompatible with the ARC / eARC" (v p. 74)

You cannot connect the TV to this unit.

z What is ARC and eARC? ARC (Audio Return Channel) sends audio back to this unit using the same HDMI cable that sends video from this unit to your TV. This allows this unit to process the sound from your TV's built-in tuner and apps. TVs with eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) port provide additional support for high bitrate multichannel audio (Dolby Atmos, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD and DTS:X). Please refer to your TV Owner's Manual for details about eARC support for your particular model.

NOTE 0 Use a TV with a 2 prong power plug for this unit. Do not connect a TV with a 3 prong power plug, as this may cause noise.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC / eARC
Using a high quality HDMI cablez, connect one end to the HDMI port labeled "eARC" or "ARC" on your TV. Connect the other end to the HDMI OUT TV 1 port on this unit. When a TV with eARC support is connected, the eARC function of this unit is enabled automatically and the television audio is played back. When a TV with ARC support is connected, set "ARC" in the menu to "On". (v p. 202)

TV
HDMI IN
(ARC / eARC)

z For 4K TVs we recommend using an HDMI cable labeled "High Speed" and "with Ethernet".
z For 8K TVs we recommend using an HDMI cable labeled "Ultra High Speed".

0 eARC function settings may be required depending on the eARC function-compatible television you are using. Make sure eARC is set to on if this setting exists on your television. For more information, check your television's owner's manual.
0 Set "4K/8K Signal Format" to "8K Enhanced" in the menu to enjoy 8K video. (v p. 208)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC / eARC

Use an HDMI cable to connect the TV to this unit. To listen to audio from TV on this unit, use an optical cable to connect the TV to this unit.

TV
OUT
OPTICAL OUT

IN
HDMI IN

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Connecting a playback device
This unit is equipped with three types of video input connectors (HDMI, component video and composite video) and three types of audio input connectors (HDMI, digital audio and audio). Select input connectors on this unit according to the connectors equipped on the device you want to connect. If the device connected to this unit is equipped with an HDMI connector, it is recommended to use HDMI connections. In the HDMI connection, audio and video signals can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable.

0 "Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)" (v p. 76) 0 "Connecting a media player" (v p. 77) 0 "Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player or DVD player" (v p. 78) 0 "Connecting a game console or player device compatible with 8K" (v p. 79) 0 "Connecting a turntable" (v p. 80)

0 Connect devices to this unit as indicated by the input sources printed on the audio/video input connectors of this unit.
0 The source that is assigned to the HDMI IN, DIGITAL AUDIO IN, COMPONENT VIDEO IN, VIDEO IN and AUDIO IN connectors can be changed. See "Input Assign" on how to change the input source assigned to the input connectors. (v p. 210)
0 To play back audio signals that are input to this unit on a TV connected via HDMI, set in the menu "HDMI Audio Out" to "TV". (v p. 200)
0 To enjoy content that is copyright protected by HDCP 2.2 or HDCP 2.3, use a playback device and TV compatible with HDCP 2.2 or HDCP 2.3.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)

This explanation uses the connection with a satellite tuner/cable TV STB as an example. Select the input connectors on this unit to match the connectors on the device that you want to connect to.

Satellite tuner / Cable TV
HDMI OUT

(HDMI incompatible device)

Satellite tuner /

Cable TV

AUDIO

VIDEO

AUDIO OUT
RL

COAXIAL OUT

VIDEO OUT

RL
or
RL

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Connecting a media player

This explanation uses the connection with a media player as an example. Select the input connectors on this unit to match the connectors on the device that you want to connect to.

Media player
HDMI OUT

(HDMI incompatible device)

Media player

AUDIO

AUDIO OUT
RL

COAXIAL OUT

VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Y PB PR

RL
or
RL

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player or DVD player

This explanation uses the connection with a Blu-ray Disc player or DVD player as an example. Select the input connectors on this unit to match the connectors on the device that you want to connect to.

Blu-ray Disc player / DVD player
HDMI OUT

(HDMI incompatible device) Blu-ray Disc player / DVD player

AUDIO
AUDIO OUT
RL

VIDEO
VIDEO OUT

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Connecting a game console or player device compatible with 8K
This unit supports 8K HDMI video signals.

Game console

8K player

HDMI OUT

Appendix

0 Use a certified "Ultra High Speed HDMI cable" to enjoy 8K or 4K 120Hz video.
0 Set "4K/8K Signal Format" to "8K Enhanced" in the menu to enjoy 8K video. (v p. 208)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Connecting a turntable
This unit is compatible with turntables equipped with a moving magnet (MM) phono cartridge. When you connect to a turntable with a low output moving coil (MC) cartridge, use a commercially available MC head amp or a step-up transformer. If you set this unit's input source to "Phono" and you accidentally increase the volume without having a turntable connected, you may hear a hum noise from the speakers.
Turntable (MM cartridge)

AUDIO OUT
LR

GND

NOTE
0 The earth terminal (SIGNAL GND) of this unit is not for safety grounding purposes. If this terminal is connected when there is a lot of noise, the noise can be reduced. Note that depending on the turntable, connecting the ground line may have the reverse effect of increasing noise. In this case, it is not necessary to connect the ground line.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Connecting a USB memory device to the USB port
For operating instructions see "Playing a USB memory device" (v p. 92).
USB memory device

Appendix

0 Denon does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power. When using a portable USB hard disk drive (HDD) which came with an AC adapter, use that device's supplied AC adapter.
0 The USB port on the rear panel can only be used to supply power (5 V/1.5 A). It cannot be used to play music files. (v p. 27)
NOTE 0 USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub. 0 It is not possible to use this unit by connecting the unit's USB port to a PC via a USB cable. 0 Do not use an extension cable when connecting a USB memory device. This may cause radio interference with other devices.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Connecting FM/AM antennas
Connect the antenna, tune in to a broadcast and then move the antenna to the location where there is least noise. Then use tape, etc. to fix the antenna in this location. ("Listening to FM/AM broadcasts" (v p. 104))

0 If you are unable to receive a good broadcast signal, we recommend installing an outdoor antenna. For details, inquire at the retail store where you purchased the unit.
NOTE 0 Make sure the AM loop antenna lead terminals do not touch metal parts of the
panel.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

AM loop antenna (supplied)

FM indoor antenna (supplied)

Black White

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

o Using the AM loop antenna
Suspending on a wall Suspend directly on a wall without assembling.

Playback

Nail, tack, etc.
Standing alone Use the procedure shown above to assemble. When assembling, refer to "AM loop antenna assembly".

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o AM loop antenna assembly

1 Put the stand section through the bottom of the loop antenna from the rear and bend it forward.
2 Insert the projecting part into the square hole in the stand.

Loop antenna

Stand Square hole

Projecting part

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Connecting to a home network (LAN)

This unit can connect to a network using a wired LAN or wireless LAN. You can connect this unit to your home network (LAN) to enable various types of playback and operations as described below. 0 Playback of network audio such as Internet Radio and from your media
server(s) 0 Playback of streaming music services 0 Using the Apple AirPlay function 0 Operation on this unit via the network 0 Operation with the HEOS wireless multi-room sound system 0 Firmware Update
For connections to the Internet, contact an ISP (Internet Service Provider) or a computer shop.

Wired LAN

To make connections via wired LAN, use a LAN cable to connect the router to this unit as shown in the figure below.

NAS

(Network Attached

Storage)

Modem

Internet

Router

To WAN side
To LAN port To LAN port

LAN port / Ethernet connector

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Wireless LAN

When connecting to the network via wireless LAN, connect the external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity connection to the rear panel and stand them upright.
See "Wi-Fi Setup" on how to connect to a wireless LAN router. (v p. 254)

Internet

Modem

To WAN side

Router with access point

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 When using this unit, we recommend you use a router equipped with the following functions:
0 Built-in DHCP server This function automatically assigns IP addresses on the LAN.
0 Built-in 100BASE-TX switch When connecting multiple devices, we recommend a switching hub with a speed of 100 Mbps or greater.
0 Only use a shielded STP or ScTP LAN cable (readily available at electronics stores). (CAT-5 or greater recommended)
0 The normal shielded-type LAN cable is recommended. If a flat-type cable or unshielded-type cable is used, other devices could be affected by noise.
0 When using this unit connected to a network with no DHCP function, configure the IP address, etc. in "Network". (v p. 253)
NOTE
0 The types of routers that can be used depend on the ISP. Contact your ISP or a computer shop for details.
0 This unit is not compatible with PPPoE. A PPPoE compatible router is required if your contracted line is not set using PPPoE.
0 Do not connect a NETWORK connector directly to the LAN port / Ethernet connector on your computer.
0 Various online services may be discontinued without prior notice.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Connecting an external control device

REMOTE CONTROL jacks
When this unit is installed in a location where the remote control signals cannot reach (installation in a cabinet etc.), it can still be controlled by the remote control by connecting a remote control receiver unit (sold separately). You can also use it to remotely control ZONE2 and ZONE3 (another rooms).

Infrared retransmitter

Infrared sensor

AUX OUT

Input

Output

Device fitted with REMOTE CONTROL IN connectors

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

TRIGGER OUT jacks
When a device with TRIGGER IN jack is connected, the connected device's power on/standby can be controlled through linked operation to this unit. A digital signal of a maximum of 12V DC/100mA (total 300mA) per jack will be output from the TRIGGER OUT jack.

12 V DC/100 mA trigger-compatible device

NOTE
0 Use a monaural mini-plug cable for connecting the TRIGGER OUT jack. Do not use a stereo mini-plug cable. 0 If the permissible trigger input level for the connected device is larger than 12 V DC/100 mA, or has shorted, the TRIGGER OUT jack cannot be used. In this case, turn off the
power to the unit, and disconnect it.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Connecting the power cord
After completing all the connections, insert the power plug into the power outlet.

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

To household power outlet (AC 120 V, 60 Hz)

Rear panel

Power cord (supplied)

Remote

Index

Contents
o Contents

Connections

Basic operation
Turning the power on Selecting the input source Adjusting the volume Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) Selecting a sound mode
Playback a device
Playing a Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player Playing a USB memory device Listening to music on a Bluetooth device Listening to audio on Bluetooth headphones Listening to FM/AM broadcasts

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playback network audio/service

Listening to Internet Radio

112

Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS

114

90 Getting the HEOS App

118

90 AirPlay function

127

91 Spotify Connect function

130

141 Convenience functions

Convenience functions

131

HDMI Control function

155

91 Sleep timer function

156

92 Quick select plus function

158

96 Panel lock function

162

100 Remote lock function

164

104

Other functions

Web control function

165

Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Another room)

167

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Basic operation

Playback

Input source select buttons
MUTE :

POWER X VOLUME df

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Turning the power on
1 Press POWER X to turn on power to the unit.
0 You can press the input source select button when the unit is in standby mode to turn on the power.
0 You can also switch the power to standby by pressing X on the main unit.
Selecting the input source
1 Press the input source select button to be played back. The desired input source can be selected directly.
0 You can also select the input source by turning SOURCE SELECT on the main unit.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Adjusting the volume
1 Use VOLUME df to adjust the volume.
0 The variable range differs according to the input signal and channel level setting. 0 You can also adjust the master volume by turning MASTER VOLUME on the main
unit.
Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting)
1 Press MUTE :. 0 MUTE indicator on the display flashes. 0 h appears on the TV screen.
0 The sound is reduced to the level set at "Mute Level" in the menu. (v p. 194) 0 To cancel mute, either adjust the sound volume or press MUTE : again. 0 If h is displayed on the TV screen for more than 5 minutes when the "Screen
Saver" is set to "On", the h symbol moves randomly over the TV screen. (v p. 207)

Playback a Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player
The following describes the procedure for playing Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player.
1 Prepare for playback.
A Turn on the power of the TV, subwoofer and player. B Change the TV input to the input of this unit.
2 Press POWER X to turn on power to the unit. 3 Press Blu-ray or DVD to switch an input source for a
player used for playback.
4 Play the Blu-ray Disc player or DVD player.
o Surround playback (v p. 141)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Playing a USB memory device

USB
CH/PAGE df
Cursor Up/Down/ Left/Right BACK

OPTION
ENTER 1/3 8 9

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 Playing back music files stored on a USB memory device. 0 Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class standards
can be played on this unit. 0 This unit is compatible with USB memory devices in "FAT32" or "NTFS"
format. 0 The audio format types and specifications supported by this unit for
playback are as follows. See "Playing back a USB memory devices" (v p. 313) for details.
0 WMA 0 MP3 0 WAV 0 MPEG-4 AAC 0 FLAC 0 Apple Lossless 0 DSD

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Playing files stored on USB memory devices
1 Insert a "FAT32" or "NTFS" formatted USB memory device into the USB port.
2 Press USB to switch the input source to "USB". 3 Select the name of this unit.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

4 Browse the music on your USB memory device and select something to play.

0 When you select something to play you will be asked how you want to queue up your music.

Play Now:
Play Now & Replace Queue:
Play Next:
Add to End of Queue:

Inserts the item into the queue after the currently playing track and plays the selected item immediately.
Clears the queue and plays the selected item immediately.
Inserts the item into the queue after the current song and plays it when the current song ends.
Adds the item to the end of the queue.

USB Music - Nature
Nature 01
Play Now Play Now & Replace Queue
Play Next Add to End of Queue
Cancel

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

5 Use cursor Up/Down to select the "Play Now" or "Play Now & Replace Queue", then press ENTER. Playback starts.
Now Playing

Settings
Operation buttons 1/3 89 CH/PAGE d f

Tips

Appendix

Function Playback / Pause Skip to previous track / Skip to next track Switch to the previous page/next page in the list display

Nature 01 - Various Artists Nature

2:45

-14:21

0 When an MP3 music file includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while playing the file.
NOTE 0 Note that Denon will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any problems arising with
the data on a USB memory device when using this unit in conjunction with the USB memory device. 0 When a USB memory device is connected to this unit, the unit loads all of the files on the USB memory device. Loading may take a while if the USB memory device contains a large number of folders and/or files.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Operations accessible through the option menu
0 "Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog Enhancer)" (v p. 133)
0 "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)" (v p. 134)
0 "Adjusting the tone (Tone)" (v p. 135) 0 "Adjusting audio delay (Audio Delay)" (v p. 136)
0 "Changing the strength of Tactile Transducer according to the input source (Tactile Transducer)" (v p. 137)
0 "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)" (v p. 138)
0 "Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)" (v p. 139)
0 "Changing the speaker settings to match the listening environment (Speaker Preset)" (v p. 140)
0 Changing the "Dirac Live Filter" https://manuals.denon.com/DiracLive/ALL/EN/DRDZSYktvnhzad.php

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Listening to music on a Bluetooth device

POWER X Bluetooth

Music files stored on Bluetooth devices such as smartphones, digital music players, etc. can be enjoyed on this unit by pairing and connecting this unit with the Bluetooth device. Communication is possible up to a range of about 98.4 ft/30 m.
NOTE 0 To play back music from a Bluetooth device, the Bluetooth device needs to
support the A2DP profile.

BACK

OPTION
1/3 8 9

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing music from Bluetooth device
In order to enjoy music from a Bluetooth device on this unit, the Bluetooth device must first be paired with this unit. Once the Bluetooth device has been paired, it does not need to be paired again.
1 Prepare for playback.
A Connect the supplied external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity to the Bluetooth/wireless LAN antenna connectors on the rear panel. (v p. 27)
B Press POWER X to turn on power to the unit.
2 Press Bluetooth. When using for the first time, the unit will go into the pairing mode automatically and "Pairing..." will appear on the display of the unit.
3 Activate the Bluetooth settings on your mobile device.

4 Select this unit when its name appears in the list of devices displayed on the screen of the Bluetooth device. Connect to the Bluetooth device while "Pairing" is being displayed on the display of the unit. Perform the connection with the Bluetooth device close to the unit (about 3.3 ft/1 m).
5 Play music using any app on your Bluetooth device. 0 The Bluetooth device can also be operated with the remote control of this unit. 0 The next time the Bluetooth button is pressed on the remote control unit, this unit automatically connects to the last Bluetooth device that was connected.

Operation buttons 1/3 89

Function Playback / Pause Skip to previous track / Skip to next track

0 Press STATUS on this unit during playback to switch the display between Title name, Artist name, Album name, etc.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Pairing with other Bluetooth devices
Pair a Bluetooth device with this unit.
1 Activate the Bluetooth settings on your mobile device. 2 Press and hold Bluetooth on the remote control unit for
at least 3 seconds. This unit will go into the pairing mode.
3 Select this unit when its name appears in the list of devices displayed on the screen of the Bluetooth device.
0 This unit can be paired with a maximum of 8 Bluetooth devices. When a 9th Bluetooth device is paired, it will be registered in place of the oldest registered device.
0 You can also enter pairing mode by pressing the OPTION button when the Bluetooth playback screen is displayed and selecting "Pairing Mode" from the displayed option menu.

NOTE
0 To operate the Bluetooth device with the remote control of this unit, the Bluetooth device needs to support the AVRCP profile.
0 The remote control of this unit is not guaranteed to work with all Bluetooth devices. 0 Depending on the type of Bluetooth device, this unit outputs audio that is coupled
to the volume setting on the Bluetooth device.
o Operations accessible through the option menu
0 "Pairing with other Bluetooth devices" (v p. 98) 0 "Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog
Enhancer)" (v p. 133) 0 "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)" (v p. 134) 0 "Adjusting the tone (Tone)" (v p. 135) 0 "Adjusting audio delay (Audio Delay)" (v p. 136) 0 "Changing the strength of Tactile Transducer according to the input
source (Tactile Transducer)" (v p. 137) 0 "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)" (v p. 138) 0 "Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)" (v p. 139) 0 "Changing the speaker settings to match the listening environment
(Speaker Preset)" (v p. 140) 0 Changing the "Dirac Live Filter"
https://manuals.denon.com/DiracLive/ALL/EN/DRDZSYktvnhzad.php

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Reconnecting to this unit from a Bluetooth device
After pairing is completed, the Bluetooth device can be connected without performing any operations on this unit. This operation also needs to be performed when switching the Bluetooth device for playback.
1 If a Bluetooth device is currently connected, deactivate the Bluetooth setting of that device to disconnect it.
2 Activate the Bluetooth setting of the Bluetooth device to be connected.
3 Select this unit from the Bluetooth device list on your Bluetooth device.
4 Play music using any app on your Bluetooth device.

0 The screen automatically switches to the "Bluetooth" playback screen if a Bluetooth device is connected while the power of this unit is on.
0 When the "Network Control" setting of this unit is set to "Always On" and a Bluetooth device is connected with the unit in the standby state, the power of the unit will be turned on automatically. (v p. 257)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Listening to audio on Bluetooth headphones
You can listen to audio playing through the MAIN ZONE of this unit on Bluetooth headphones. Output audio from connected speakers and Bluetooth headphones simultaneously, or only using Bluetooth headphones.

Appendix

(Output Mode: Bluetooth + Speakers)

(Output Mode: Bluetooth Only)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

100

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Listening to audio on Bluetooth headphones

1 Set "Transmitter" to "On" from the "General" "Bluetooth Transmitter" setting in the menu. (v p. 266)

2 Select "Output Mode", and set audio output method.

Bluetooth + Speakers (Default):

Audio is output to Bluetooth headphones and main zone speakers.
This simultaneous output is suitable for family movie night and other group activities.

Bluetooth Only:

Audio is output to Bluetooth headphones only.
This is suitable for listening to music or watching movies by yourself at night when you need to keep quiet.

3 Enter pairing mode on the Bluetooth headphones you want to connect to this unit.

4 Select "Device List" and select the name of the Bluetooth headphones from the device list.

5 Adjust the volume of connected Bluetooth headphones after the connection is completed.

0 "Output Mode" can also be set from "Bluetooth Transmitter" in the option menu. 0 A2DP profile-compatible Bluetooth speakers can be connected following the same
steps used to connect Bluetooth headphones.
NOTE
0 The volume of Bluetooth headphones cannot be adjusted through this unit's MASTER VOLUME or the VOLUME on the remote control unit. Adjust the volume through the Bluetooth headphones.
0 If you are using Bluetooth headphones that do not have volume control, or if the volume is insufficient, you can control the volume by adjusting the "Level" of the "Bluetooth Transmitter" from the options menu. (v p. 102)
0 Stereo mode is fixed as the sound mode when using Bluetooth headphones. Any sound modes and other audio settings are not reflected in audio output on Bluetooth headphones. Audio settings, sound modes and All Zone Stereo mode are not available while using Bluetooth headphones and "Output Mode" is set to "Bluetooth Only".
0 Audio may be delayed when sent over Bluetooth. 0 Bluetooth headphones cannot be connected when use a Bluetooth input source in
any zone. Furthermore, selecting a Bluetooth input source in any zone will terminate the connection between this unit and Bluetooth headphones. 0 Bluetooth headphones cannot be connected when this unit is grouped in the HEOS App.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

101

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Adjusting the volume of Bluetooth headphones
If you are using Bluetooth headphones that do not have volume control, or if the volume is insufficient, you can control the volume by adjusting the "Level" of the "Bluetooth Transmitter" from the options menu.
1 Press OPTION. An option menu screen is displayed. 0 When the input source is "HEOS Music", an option menu for online music is displayed. Select "AVR Options...", then press ENTER.
2 Use cursor Up/Down to select "Bluetooth Transmitter", then press ENTER. The "Bluetooth Transmitter" screen is displayed.
3 Use cursor Up/Down to select "Level". 4 Use cursor Left/Right to adjust the volume, then press
ENTER.
50 dB +10 dB (Default: 0 dB)

Reconnecting to a Bluetooth headphones
Follow any of the steps below to reconnect the most recently used Bluetooth headphones: 0 Reconnect to this unit with Bluetooth headphone's reconnect function. 0 Go to "Bluetooth Transmitter" and then select "Reconnect" within the
options menu. 0 If "Output Mode" is set to "Bluetooth + Speakers", this unit will
automatically connect to the most recently used Bluetooth headphones when power is turned on. 0 Select the device you wish to connect from the "Device List" under "Bluetooth Transmitter" in the menu. (v p. 266)

0 This setting applies to all connected Bluetooth headphones, regardless of type.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

102

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Disconnecting Bluetooth headphones
Complete any of the following steps to disconnect your Bluetooth headphones: 0 Turn off your Bluetooth headphones. 0 Go to "Bluetooth Transmitter" and then select "Disconnect" within the
options menu. 0 In the setup menu, go to "General" - "Bluetooth Transmitter", and set
"Transmitter" to Off. (v p. 266)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

103

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Listening to FM/AM broadcasts

Settings

Tips

Appendix

You can use the built-in tuner of this unit to listen to FM broadcasts and AM broadcasts. Make sure the FM antenna and AM loop antenna are connected to this unit first.

TUNER

CH/PAGE df
Cursor Up/Down/ Left/Right BACK

OPTION
ENTER TUNE +,

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

104

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Listening to FM/AM broadcasts
1 Connect the antenna. ("Connecting FM/AM antennas" (v p. 82))
2 Press TUNER to switch the input source to "Tuner".
G TV screen H

Tuner

Now Playing

STEREO

AUTO

CH 1

FM 92.10 MHz

Tune

Preset

OPTION Option

GDisplay of this unitH
01 FM 92.10MHz
3 Press OPTION. The option menu screen is displayed.
4 Use cursor Up/Down to select "FM/AM", then press ENTER. This displays the reception band input screen.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

5 Use cursor Left/Right to select "FM" or "AM", then press ENTER.

FM:

When listening to an FM broadcast.

AM:

When listening to an AM broadcast.

6 Press TUNE + or TUNE to select the station you want listen to.
Scanning is performed until it finds an available radio station. When it finds a radio station, it stops the scan automatically and tunes in.

0 The modes for receiving FM broadcasts consists of "Auto" mode that automatically searches available broadcast stations and "Manual" mode that lets you tune in using buttons to change the frequency. The default setting is "Auto". You can also use "Direct Tune" to tune in by entering the frequency directly.
In "Auto" mode, you cannot tune in to radio stations if the reception is not good. If this is the case, then use the "Manual" mode or "Direct Tune" mode to tune in.

Operation buttons TUNE +, CH/PAGE d f Cursor Up/Down Cursor Left/Right

Function Selects the radio station (up/down) Selects preset radio stations Selects the radio station (up/down) Selects preset radio stations

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

105

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Operations accessible through the option menu
0 "Tuning in by entering the frequency (Direct Tune)" (v p. 106) 0 "Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode)" (v p. 107)
0 "Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto Preset Memory)" (v p. 107)
0 "Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset Memory)" (v p. 108)
0 "Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset Name)" (v p. 109)
0 "Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip)" (v p. 110)
0 "Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog Enhancer)" (v p. 133)
0 "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)" (v p. 134)
0 "Adjusting the tone (Tone)" (v p. 135) 0 "Adjusting audio delay (Audio Delay)" (v p. 136)
0 "Changing the strength of Tactile Transducer according to the input source (Tactile Transducer)" (v p. 137)
0 "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)" (v p. 138)
0 "Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)" (v p. 139)
0 "Changing the speaker settings to match the listening environment (Speaker Preset)" (v p. 140)
0 Changing the "Dirac Live Filter" https://manuals.denon.com/DiracLive/ALL/EN/DRDZSYktvnhzad.php

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Tuning in by entering the frequency (Direct Tune)
You can enter the receiving frequency directly to tune in.
1 Press OPTION when the input source is "Tuner". The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use cursor Up/Down to select "Direct Tune", then press ENTER. The screen that lets you enter the frequency is displayed.
3 Use cursor Up/Down to select a number, then press cursor Right. 0 If cursor Left is pressed, the immediately preceding input is cancelled.
4 Repeat step 3 and enter the frequency of the radio station you want to hear.
5 When setting is completed, press ENTER. The preset frequency is tuned in.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

106

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode)
You can change the mode for tuning into FM and AM broadcasts. If you cannot tune in automatically with "Auto" mode, change the mode to "Manual" and tune in manually.
1 Press OPTION when the input source is "Tuner". The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use cursor Up/Down to select "Tune Mode", then press ENTER.
3 Use cursor Left/Right to select the tune mode, then press ENTER.

Auto: Manual:

Automatically search for and tune to a receivable radio station.
Manually change the frequency one step at a time each time the button is pressed.

Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto Preset Memory)
A maximum of 56 radio stations can be automatically preset.
1 Press OPTION when the input source is "Tuner". The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use cursor Up/Down to select "Auto Preset Memory", then press ENTER.
3 Press ENTER. The unit starts to tune in to radio stations automatically and preset them. 0 When presetting is completed, "Completed" is displayed for about 5 seconds and the option menu screen turns off.
0 The preset memory is overwritten.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

107

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset Memory)
Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you can tune them in easily. Up to 56 stations can be preset.
1 Tune in the broadcast station you want to preset. ("Listening to FM/AM broadcasts" (v p. 105))
2 Press OPTION. The option menu screen is displayed.
3 Use cursor Up/Down to select "Preset Memory", then press ENTER. The list of already preset channels is displayed.
4 Use cursor Up/Down to select the channel you want to preset, then press ENTER. The current broadcast station that is preset. 0 To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to 4.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Channel 1 8 9 16
17 24 25 32 33 40 41 48 49 56

Default settings
92.10 / 92.30 / 92.50 / 92.70 / 93.10 / 93.50 / 93.70 / 94.10 MHz
94.30 / 94.50 / 94.70 / 94.90 / 95.10 / 95.30 / 95.50 / 95.70 MHz
98.10 / 98.30 / 98.50 / 98.70 / 98.90 / 99.10 / 100.10 / 100.30 MHz
100.50 / 100.70 / 100.90 / 101.10 / 101.30 / 101.50 / 101.70 / 101.90 MHz
103.10 / 103.30 / 103.50 / 103.70 / 103.90 / 104.10 / 104.30 / 104.50 MHz
104.70 / 104.90 / 105.10 / 105.30 / 105.50 / 105.70 / 105.90 / 106.10 MHz
106.30 / 106.50 / 106.70 / 106.90 / 107.10 / 107.30 / 107.50 / 107.90 MHz

Listening to preset stations
1 Use CH/PAGE df to select the desired preset channel.

0 You can also select preset broadcast stations by pressing TUNER PRESET CH + or TUNER PRESET CH on the main unit.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

108

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset Name)
You can set the name to the preset broadcast station or change it. Up to 8 characters can be input.
1 Press OPTION when the input source is "Tuner". The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use cursor Up/Down to select "Preset Name", then press ENTER. The "Preset Name" screen is displayed.
3 Use cursor Left/Right to select the group of the broadcast station you want to name.
4 Use cursor Up/Down to select the broadcast station you want to name, then press ENTER. The screen that lets you edit the Preset Name is displayed. 0 If you select "Clear", then the unit returns to displaying the frequency.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

5 Enter the characters, then press "OK". 6 Press OPTION to return to the previous screen.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

109

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip)
Perform auto preset memory to save all the broadcasting stations that can be received in the memory. Selecting a broadcast station becomes easier by skipping unnecessary memories.
1 Press OPTION when the input source is "Tuner". The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use cursor Up/Down to select "Preset Skip", then press ENTER. The "Preset Skip" screen is displayed.
3 n To set the stations you want to skip by groups
A Use cursor Left/Right to select the group of broadcast stations you want to skip.
B Press cursor Up to select "Set z z to Skip", then press ENTER. Skip all the broadcast stations that are included in the selected group "z-z". (z is the selected group number.)

n To set the stations you want to skip by stations
A Use cursor Left/Right to select the group of broadcast stations you want to skip.
B Use cursor Up/Down to select the broadcast station you want to skip.
C Use cursor Left/Right to select "Skip". The station you selected is not displayed.
4 Press OPTION to return to the previous screen.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

110

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Cancelling Preset Skip
1 While the "Preset Skip" screen is displayed, use cursor Left/Right to select a group containing a broadcast station to cancel the skip for.
2 Use cursor Up/Down to select a broadcast station to cancel the skip for.
3 Use cursor Left/Right to select "On". The skip is cancelled.
NOTE 0 "Preset Skip" cannot be cancelled for groups.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

111

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Listening to Internet Radio

CH/PAGE df
Cursor Up/Down/ Left/Right BACK

(HEOS Music) INTERNET RADIO
OPTION
ENTER 1/3 8 9

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 Internet Radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the Internet. Internet Radio stations from around the world can be received.
0 The Internet Radio station list on this unit the database service provided by TuneIn Radio service.
0 The audio format types and specifications supported by this unit for playback are as follows. See "Playing back Internet Radio" (v p. 316) for details.
0 WMA 0 MP3 0 MPEG-4 AAC

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

112

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Listening to Internet Radio

1 Press INTERNET RADIO. 0 You can also press R (HEOS Music). Use cursor Up/Down to select "TuneIn Internet Radio", then press ENTER.
2 Select the station you want to play.

Operation buttons

Function

1/3z

Playback / Pause

89z

Skip to previous track / Skip to next track

CH/PAGE d f

Switch to the previous page/next page in the list display

z Enabled when playing Podcasts.

0 The display switches between track title and radio station name etc. each time the main unit's STATUS is pressed.
NOTE 0 The radio station database service may be suspended or be otherwise unavailable
without notice.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Operations accessible through the option menu
0 "Adding to HEOS Favorites" (v p. 133)
0 "Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog Enhancer)" (v p. 133)
0 "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)" (v p. 134)
0 "Adjusting the tone (Tone)" (v p. 135) 0 "Adjusting audio delay (Audio Delay)" (v p. 136)
0 "Changing the strength of Tactile Transducer according to the input source (Tactile Transducer)" (v p. 137)
0 "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)" (v p. 138)
0 "Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)" (v p. 139)
0 "Changing the speaker settings to match the listening environment (Speaker Preset)" (v p. 140)
0 Changing the "Dirac Live Filter" https://manuals.denon.com/DiracLive/ALL/EN/DRDZSYktvnhzad.php

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

113

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS

CH/PAGE df

(HEOS Music)

0 This unit can play back music files and playlists (m3u, wpl) from DLNA compatible servers including PCs and NAS devices on your network.
0 Supported file formats: For details, see "Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS" (v p. 315).
0 WMA 0 MP3 0 WAV 0 MPEG-4 AAC 0 FLAC 0 Apple Lossless 0 DSD

Cursor Up/Down/ Left/Right
BACK

OPTION
ENTER 1/3 8 9

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

114

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS
Use this procedure to play music files or playlists stored on DLNA files servers on your local network.
1 Press R (HEOS Music). If a playback history is present, the last Internet radio station or song played is played back. Pressing R (HEOS Music) again displays the HEOS Music top menu.
2 Use cursor Up/Down to select "Music Servers", then press ENTER.
Music

4 Browse the music on your PC/NAS and select something to play.

0 When you select something to play you will be asked how you want to queue up your music.

Play Now:
Play Now & Replace Queue:
Play Next:
Add to End of Queue:

TuneIn Internet Radio HEOS Favorites Music Servers USB Music
3 Select the name of your networked PC or NAS (Network Attached Storage) server.

Music Servers - Live
Nature 01
Play Now Play Now & Replace Queue
Play Next Add to End of Queue
Cancel

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

115

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

5 Use cursor Up/Down to select the "Play Now" or "Play Now & Replace Queue", then press ENTER. Playback starts.
Now Playing

2:45
Operation buttons 1/3 89 CH/PAGE d f

Live 01 - Various Artists Live

-14:21

Function Playback / Pause Skip to previous track / Skip to next track Switch to the previous page/next page in the list display

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 The display switches between track title, artist name, and album title each time the main unit's STATUS is pressed.
0 When a WMA (Windows Media Audio), MP3 or MPEG-4 AAC file includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while the music files are playing.
0 If you use Ver.11 or later of Windows Media Player, the album art for WMA files can be displayed.
NOTE
0 When playing back music files with your PC or NAS connected through wireless LAN, audio may be interrupted depending on your wireless LAN environment. In this case, connect using a wired LAN.
0 The order in which the tracks/files are displayed depends on the server specifications. If the tracks/files are not displayed in alphabetical order due to the server specifications, searching by the first letter may not work properly.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

116

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

117

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Getting the HEOS App
You can use many online music streaming services from the HEOS App. Depending upon your geographical location, there are several options to choose from. Download the HEOS App for iOS or Android by searching App Store, Google Play store or Amazon Appstore for "HEOS".

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

118

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

HEOS Account
HEOS Accounts can be registered by tapping "Music" tab - "Settings" icon in the HEOS App.
Once you create or sign into your HEOS Account, you can use the HEOS Favorites feature to save and recall your favorite streaming radio stations using the on-screen user interface on your AVR.
o What is a HEOS Account?
A HEOS Account is master account or "keychain" for managing all of your HEOS music services with one single username and password.
o Why do I need a HEOS Account?
With the HEOS Account you just have to enter your music services login names and passwords one time. This allows you to easily and quickly use multiple controller apps on different devices. You just log into your HEOS Account on any device and you will have access to all of your associated music services, play history and custom playlists, even if you are at a friend's house listening to music on their HEOS system.
o Signing up for a HEOS Account
You will be instructed to signup for a HEOS Account the first time you try to access any music service from the main "Music" menu of the HEOS App.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Changing your HEOS Account

1 Tap the "Music" tab.

2 Select the Settings icon the screen.

in the upper left corner of

3 Select "HEOS Account".

4 Change your location, change your password, delete your account or sign out of your account.

0 This unit automatically synchronizes when you change your settings or sign out of your account in the HEOS App.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

119

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Playing from streaming music services
A music service is an online music company that provides access to vast music collections via free and/or paid subscriptions. Depending upon your geographical location, there are several options to choose from.
NOTE 0 The HEOS App and brand is not affiliated with any manufacturer of any mobile
device. Availability of music services may vary by region. Not all services may be available at time of purchase. Some services may be added or discontinued from time to time based on decisions of the music service providers or others.
o Selecting a room/device
1 Tap the "Rooms" tab, and select "Denon AVR-X6800H" if there are multiple products with HEOS Built-in.

0 Tap the Pencil icon displayed name.

at the top right to switch edit mode. You can change the

Settings

Tips
Rooms
Drag one room into another to group them
Dining L + Dining R Song Name 1
Kitchen Song Name 2
Denon AVR-X6800H Song Name 3

Appendix

Rooms

Music

Now Playing

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

120

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Selecting the music track or station from music sources

1 Tap the "Music" tab and select a music source.

0 All music services displayed may not be available in your location.

Settings

Tips
Music

Appendix

Rooms

Music

Now Playing

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

121

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

2 Browse the music to play. After selecting a music track or radio station the app will automatically change to the "Now Playing" screen.

0 When you select a music track to play you will be asked how you want to queue up your music.

Play Now:
Play Now & Replace Queue:
Play Next:
Add to End of Queue:

0 When you select a radio station the following items are displayed.

Play Now:

Plays the selected item immediately.

Add to HEOS Favorites: Adds to HEOS Favorites.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Album
Artist Album 10 Tracks,60 Mins.,2014

1 Track 1

0:20

2 Track 2

Track 01 Rooms

0:50

Play Now

Play Now & Replace Queue

Play Next Add to End of Queue

HEOS 3

Cancel
Music

Now Playing

2:51
Track 01 Artist Album

-1:40

Rooms

Music

Now Playing

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

122

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Listening to the same music in multiple rooms

This system is a true multi-room audio system. You can create one or

more HEOS groups to automatically synchronize audio playback between

multiple products with HEOS Built-in so that the music playing different

rooms is perfectly in sync and always sounds amazing! You can easily

add up to 32 products to your system in total. You can group up to 16

individual products to have them play the same song fully synchronized.

o Grouping rooms

Rooms
Drag one room into another to group them Dining Song Name 1
Living Kitchen Song Name 2

Bedroom Song Name 3

1 Press and hold your finger on room that is not playing music.
2 Drag it into the room that is playing music and lift your finger.
3 The two rooms will be grouped together into a single device group and both rooms will be playing the same music in perfect sync.

Rooms

Music

Now Playing

Appendix

Rooms
Drag one room into another to group them
Dining Song Name 1
Living+Kitchen Song Name 2
Living
Kitchen Drag a room out of this group to ungroup it
Bedroom Song Name 3

Rooms

Music

Now Playing

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

123

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Ungrouping rooms

1 Press and hold your finger on room that you want to remove from the group.
2 Drag it out of the group and lift your finger.

NOTE 0 You can not remove the first room that started playing the music before grouping.

Settings

Tips

Rooms
Drag one room into another to group them
Dining Song Name 1

Living Song Name 2
Living
Kitchen Bedroom Song Name 3

Rooms

Music

Now Playing

Appendix
Rooms
Drag one room into another to group them Dining Song Name 1
Living Song Name 2
Kitchen Song Name 4
Bedroom Song Name 3

Rooms

Music

Now Playing

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

124

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Grouping all rooms (party mode)
You can easily group 16 rooms together into Party Mode by using a "pinch" gesture.
1 Place two fingers on the screen over the list of rooms. 2 Quickly pinch your two fingers together and release. 3 All of your rooms will be joined together and begin
playing the same music in perfect sync.

Settings

Tips

Rooms
Drag one room into another to group them
Dining Song Name 1
Living Song Name 2
Kitchen Song Name 3
Bedroom Song Name 4

Appendix

Rooms
Drag one room into another to group them
Dining+Living+... Song Name 1
Dining
Living
Kitchen
Bedroom
Drag a room out of this group to ungroup it

Rooms

Music

Now Playing

Rooms

Music

Now Playing

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

125

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Ungrouping all rooms
You can easily ungroup all of your rooms and exit Party Mode by using a "spread" gesture.
1 Place two fingers close together on the screen over list of rooms.
2 Quickly spread your two fingers apart from each other and release.
3 All of your rooms will be ungrouped.

Settings

Tips

Rooms
Drag one room into another to group them
Dining Song Name 1
Dining Living
Kitchen
Bedroom Drag a room out of this group to ungroup it

Appendix

Rooms
Drag one room into another to group them
Dining Song Name 1
Living Song Name 2
Kitchen Song Name 3
Bedroom Song Name 4

Rooms

Music

Now Playing

Rooms

Music

Now Playing

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

126

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

AirPlay function
Music files stored on your iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes can be played on this unit via the network.

0 Source input will be switched to "HEOS Music" when AirPlay playback is started. 0 You can stop AirPlay playback by choosing other input source. 0 To see song and artist names together, press STATUS on the main unit. 0 For information about how to use iTunes, also see the Help for iTunes. 0 The screen may differ depending on the OS and software versions.

This unit supports AirPlay 2.
Sync multiple AirPlay 2 compatible devices/speakers for simultaneous playback.

0 This unit supports AirPlay 2 and requires iOS 11.4 or later.

Settings Router

Tips PC

Appendix This unit

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

127

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing songs from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad

If you update your "iPhone/iPod touch/iPad" to iOS 10.0.2 or later, you can stream music stored in your "iPhone/iPod touch/iPad" directly to this unit.

1 Connect your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad Wi-Fi to the same network as this unit. 0 For details, see your device's manual.

2 Play the song on your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad. AirPlay icon is displayed on the iPhone, iPod touch or iPad screen.

3 Tap the AirPlay icon and select this unit.

[Example] iOS 15

[Example] iOS 10

Playing iTunes music with this unit
1 Install iTunes 10, or later, on a Mac or Windows PC that is connected to the same network as this unit.
2 Turn this unit ON. Set "Network Control" to "Always On" for this unit. (v p. 257)
NOTE 0 When "Network Control" is set to "Always On", the unit consumes more
standby power.
3 Start iTunes and click the AirPlay icon to select this unit. [Example] iTunes

AirDrop: ryone

AirPlay

4 Choose a song and click play in iTunes. The music will stream to this unit.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

128

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

NOTE 0 In playback using the AirPlay function, the sound is output at the iPhone, iPod
touch, iPad or iTunes volume setting level. You should turn down the iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes volume prior to playback and then adjust it to a suitable level.
Play a song from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad on multiple synced devices (AirPlay 2)
Songs from an iPhone, iPod touch or iPad operating iOS 11.4 or later can be synced with multiple AirPlay 2 supported devices for simultaneous playback.
1 Play the song on your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad. AirPlay icon is displayed on the iPhone, iPod touch or iPad screen.

2 Tap the AirPlay icon and select this unit. Displays a list of devices/speakers that can be played back on the same network. 0 A circle is displayed to the right of AirPlay 2 compatible devices.
AirPlay iPhone
Speakers & TVs Living Room Denon xxxxxxxx
Song - Artist
Bedroom
3 Tap the devices/speakers you want to use. 0 Multiple AirPlay 2 compatible devices can be selected.

AirPlay iPhone Speakers & TVs Living Room Denon xxxxxxxx Bedroom

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

129

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Spotify Connect function
Spotify is all the music you'll ever need. Millions of songs available instantly. Just search for the music you love, or let Spotify play you something great. Spotify works on your phone, tablet, computer and home speakers. So you'll always have the perfect soundtrack for whatever you're doing. Now you can enjoy Spotify with your free account as well as Premium account. Use your phone, tablet or computer as a remote control for Spotify. Go to www.spotify.com/connect to learn how. The Spotify software is subject to third party licenses found here: www.spotify.com/connect/third-party-licenses
Spotify server

Playing Spotify music with this unit
Download the "Spotify App" onto your Android or iOS device beforehand.
1 Connect the Wi-Fi settings of the iOS or Android device in the same network as this unit.
2 Launch the Spotify App. 3 Play back the Spotify track. 4 Tap the Spotify icon F to select the unit.
The music will stream to this unit.

This unit

Spotify App

Audio streaming /
control

Control

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

130

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Convenience functions

MAIN

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

This section explains how to use convenient functions that can be used for each input source.
These functions can only be set in the MAIN ZONE.

(HEOS Music)

Cursor Up/Down/ Left/Right

OPTION ENTER

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

131

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing back HEOS Favorites
When using the HEOS Favorites function for the first time on this unit, create a HEOS Account on the HEOS App or sign in to your account. Once you create or sign into your HEOS Account, you can use the HEOS Favorites feature to save and recall your favorite streaming radio stations using the on-screen user interface on your AVR.
1 Press R (HEOS Music). If a playback history is present, the last Internet radio station or song played is played back. Pressing R (HEOS Music) again displays the HEOS Music top menu.
2 Use cursor Up/Down to select "HEOS Favorites", then press ENTER.

3 Browse the content and select something to play.
0 "HEOS Favorites - Use HEOS app" is displayed when this unit is not synced with a HEOS Account in the HEOS App.

Music

TuneIn Internet Radio HEOS Favorites Music Servers USB Music

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

132

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Adding to HEOS Favorites
1 While content is playing, press OPTION. The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use cursor Up/Down to select "Add to HEOS Favorites", then press ENTER.
Deleting a HEOS Favorites
1 While the HEOS Favorites content list is displayed, use cursor Up/Down to select the item you want to remove from HEOS Favorites, then press OPTION.
2 Use cursor Up/Down to select "Remove from HEOS Favorites", then press ENTER.

Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog Enhancer)
This function adjusts the center channel frequency band to enhance the dialog in the movies and vocals in music for easier listening.
1 Press OPTION. An option menu screen is displayed. 0 When the input source is "HEOS Music", an option menu for online music is displayed. Select "AVR Options...", then press ENTER.
2 Use cursor Up/Down to select "Dialog Enhancer", then press ENTER. The "Dialog Enhancer" screen is displayed.
3 Use cursor Left/Right to select your favorite enhancement effect.

Low / Medium / High: Off (Default):
4 Press ENTER.

Enhances the dialog and vocals. Does not enhance the dialog or vocals.

0 "Dialog Enhancer" settings are stored for each source. 0 This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to "Direct" or "Pure Direct".

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

133

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)
The volume of each channel can be changed while listening to music. You can set this for each input source.
1 Press OPTION. An option menu screen is displayed. 0 When the input source is "HEOS Music", an option menu for online music is displayed. Select "AVR Options...", then press ENTER.
2 Use cursor Up/Down to select "Channel Level Adjust", then press ENTER. The "Channel Level Adjust" screen is displayed.
3 Use cursor Up/Down to select the channel that you wish to adjust.

4 Use cursor Left/Right to adjust the volume.
12.0 dB +12.0 dB (Default: 0.0 dB)
5 Use cursor Up/Down/Left/Right to select "Exit", then press ENTER.
0 Select "Reset" and press ENTER if you want to restore the adjustment values of the various channels to "0.0 dB" (Default).
0 Headphone volume can be adjusted when a headphone is connected. 0 "Channel Level Adjust" settings are stored for each input source. 0 You can only set this for speakers that output audio. In addition, you cannot set
this when in the menu "HDMI Audio Out" is set to "TV". (v p. 200)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

134

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Adjusting the tone (Tone)
Adjusts the tonal quality of the sound.
1 Press OPTION. An option menu screen is displayed. 0 When the input source is "HEOS Music", an option menu for online music is displayed. Select "AVR Options...", then press ENTER.
2 Use cursor Up/Down to select "Tone", then press ENTER. The "Tone" screen is displayed.
3 Use cursor Left/Right to set the tone control function to on/off.

On:
Off (Default):

Allow tone adjustment (bass, treble). Playback without tone adjustment.

4 Select "On" in step 3 and press cursor Down to select the sound range to be adjusted.

Bass: Treble:

Adjust bass. Adjust treble.

5 Use cursor Left/Right to adjust the tone, then press ENTER.

-6 dB +6 dB (Default : 0 dB)

0 "Tone" settings are stored for each input source.
0 This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to "Direct" or "Pure Direct". 0 This item cannot be set when "Dynamic EQ" is set to "On". (v p. 196)
0 You cannot set this when no audio signal is input or in the menu "HDMI Audio Out" is set to "TV". (v p. 200)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

135

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Selecting a Dirac Live filter (Dirac Live)
Set a Dirac Live filter transferred from Dirac Live software. This can be set after running Dirac Live Room Correction. See the Dirac Live Manual for details. https://manuals.denon.com/DiracLive/ALL/EN
Adjusting audio delay (Audio Delay)
Compensates for incorrect timing between video and audio.
1 Press OPTION. An option menu screen is displayed. 0 When the input source is "HEOS Music", an option menu for online music is displayed. Select "AVR Options...", then press ENTER.
2 Use cursor Up/Down to select "Audio Delay", then press ENTER. The "Audio Delay" screen is displayed.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

3 Use cursor Left/Right to set the auto lip sync function to on/off.

On (Default):
Off:

Automatically adjusts the audio processing time to compensate for delays in audio/video timing from TV compatible with Auto Lip Sync.
Do not adjust automatically.

4 Press cursor Down to select "Adjust" if the timing mismatch between the picture and sound need to be corrected manually, then use cursor Left/Right to adjust the timing.

0 ms 500 ms (Default : 0 ms)

0 "Audio Delay" settings are stored for each input source. 0 Automatic correction may not be performed depending on the specifications of
your TV even when "Auto Lip Sync" is set to "On". 0 You can also finely adjust the delay correction value set by "Auto Lip Sync".

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

136

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Changing the strength of Tactile Transducer according to the input source (Tactile Transducer)

Adjusts the volume of the tactile transducer output.

1 Press OPTION. An option menu screen is displayed.
0 When the input source is "HEOS Music", an option menu for online music is displayed. Select "AVR Options...", then press ENTER.

2 Use cursor Up/Down to select "Tactile Transducer", then press ENTER. The "Tactile Transducer" screen is displayed.

3 Use cursor Left/Right to set the tactile transducer function to on/off.

On (Default):
Off:

Enable tactile Transducer. Disable tactile Transducer.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

4 If you selected "On" in step 3, press cursor Down and adjust the "Level".
5 Use cursor Left/Right to adjust the tone, then press ENTER. -12.0 dB +12.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)

0 "Tactile Transducer" settings are stored for each input source.
0 This cannot be set when the "Speakers" - "Manual Setup" - "Advanced" - "Tactile Transducer" - "Tactile Transducer" is set to "Disabled".

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

137

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)

This unit can display video from a different source on TV during audio playback. You can set this for each input source.
n Supported input sources: CDz / Tuner / HEOS Music / Phono
z This cannot be set when HDMI connector is assigned.
1 Press OPTION. An option menu screen is displayed. 0 When the input source is "HEOS Music", an option menu for online music is displayed. Select "AVR Options...", then press ENTER.
2 Use cursor Up/Down to select "Video Select", then press ENTER. The "Video Select" screen is displayed.
3 Use cursor Left/Right to select the Video Select mode.

Off (Default):
On:

Disable Video Select mode. Enable Video Select mode.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

4 If you selected "On" in step 3, press cursor Down and select "Source".

5 Use cursor Left/Right to select the input source for video you want to play back, then press ENTER.

Last (Default):
CBL/SAT / Media Player / Blu-ray / Game1 / Game2 / AUX1 / AUX2 / CD:

Plays the video from the last input source that was played.
Plays the video from the selected input source. z

z You can select the input source to which the HDMI or video terminal is assigned.

0 "Video Select" settings are stored for each input source.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

138

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)
You can play back the music being played back in MAIN ZONE simultaneously in ZONE2 and ZONE3 (another rooms). It is useful when you want to enjoy the same music at the same time in multiple rooms during home party or when you want to play back the same background music in the entire house.
1 Press OPTION. An option menu screen is displayed. 0 When the input source is "HEOS Music", an option menu for online music is displayed. Select "AVR Options...", then press ENTER.
2 Use cursor Up/Down to select "All Zone Stereo", then press ENTER. The "All Zone Stereo" screen is displayed.
3 Select "Start", then press ENTER. 0 The input sources for ZONE2 and ZONE3 are switched to the same input source as for MAIN ZONE, and playback starts in the All Zone Stereo mode. 0 When you do not want ZONE2 or ZONE3 to participate in All Zone Stereo, press ENTER to clear the check mark and then press "Start".

o Stopping the All Zone Stereo mode
1 During playback in All Zone Stereo mode, press OPTION. An option menu screen is displayed. 0 When the input source is "HEOS Music", an option menu for online music is displayed. Select "AVR Options...", then press ENTER.
2 Use cursor Up/Down to select "All Zone Stereo", then press ENTER.
3 Select "Stop", then press ENTER.
0 The All Zone Stereo mode is canceled even when the power supply of the MAIN ZONE is turned off.
0 In the All Zone Stereo mode, only the "Multi Ch Stereo" and "Stereo" sound modes can be selected.
0 When "HDMI Audio Out" is set to "TV", the All Zone Stereo mode is not available. (v p. 200)
0 Save the All Zone Stereo mode playback status to the Quick Select Plus function to enable simple playback in All Zone Stereo mode with a single touch.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

139

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Changing the speaker settings to match the listening environment (Speaker Preset)
Two speaker settings can be saved to suit the environments where you use your speakers.
1 Press OPTION. An option menu screen is displayed. 0 When the input source is "HEOS Music", an option menu for online music is displayed. Select "AVR Options...", then press ENTER.
2 Use cursor Up/Down to select "Speaker Preset", then press ENTER. The "Speaker Preset" screen is displayed.
3 Use cursor Left/Right to set the preset.

Preset 1 (Default):
Preset 2:

Use Preset 1. Use Preset 2.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 This function can be used in the following cases.
0 Adjust the speaker settings manually after setting "Speaker Preset" to "Speaker Preset 2".
0 Save the result to "Speaker Preset 2" after performing Audyssey® Setup for a second time.
0 You can switch between Audyssey and Dirac Live easily by saving the Audyssey measurement results to "Speaker Preset 1" and the Dirac Live measurement results to "Speaker Preset 2".

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

140

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Selecting a sound mode

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

This unit allows you to enjoy various kinds of surround and stereo playback modes. Disc formats such as Blu-ray Disc and DVD, as well as being supported by digital broadcasting, and even by streaming movies and music from internet-based subscription services. This unit supports playback of almost all of these multi-channel audio formats. It also supports surround playback of audio formats other than multi-channel audio such as 2-channel stereo audio.
0 For audio formats recorded on a disc, see the disc jacket or label.

Cursor Up/Down

MOVIE MUSIC

PURE GAME

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

141

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Selecting a sound mode

1 Press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME to select a sound mode.

MOVIE : MUSIC : GAME :

Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying movies and TV programs.
Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying music.
Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying games.

0 The MOVIE, MUSIC, or GAME button memorizes the last sound mode selected for its button. Pressing MOVIE, MUSIC, or GAME recalls the same sound mode as the one selected at the previous playback.
0 If the content played back does not support the previously selected sound mode, the most appropriate sound mode for the content is automatically selected.

o Switching the sound mode
0 Press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME to display a list of the sound modes that can be selected. Each time you press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME, the sound mode changes.
0 While the list is displayed, you can also use cursor Up/Down to select a sound mode.
0 Try out various sound modes and enjoy sound mode in your favorite mode.
0 Please set the surround mode to Dolby Atmos/Surround when playing back Dolby Atmos encoded content. Dolby Atmos/Surround delivers the optimum playback experience from Blu-ray and streaming sources encoded with Dolby Atmos as well as channel based content. The default setting of this receiver is Dolby Atmos/ Surround.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

142

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

[Example] When MOVIE is pressed
MOVIE SOUND
Stereo Dolby Surround
DTS Neural:X AURO-3D
AURO Surround Multi Ch Stereo
Mono Movie

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Direct playback
Sound recorded in source is played as is.
1 Press PURE to select "Direct". Direct playback begins.

0 While DSD signals are played back, "DSD Direct" is displayed.

This unit provides not only sound modes that conform to the formats recorded on discs such as Dolby and DTS, but also extended types of modes that match your speaker configuration and "original sound modes" that create atmosphere of Rock Arena and Jazz Club, etc.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

143

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Pure Direct playback
This mode is for playback with higher sound quality than in Direct playback mode. This mode turns off the main unit display. Doing so suppresses noise sources that affect sound quality.
1 Press PURE to select "Pure Direct". The display goes dark, and Pure Direct playback begins.

Auto surround playback
This mode detects the type of input digital signal, and automatically selects the corresponding mode for playback. Perform stereo playback when the input signal is PCM. When the input signal is Dolby Digital or DTS, the music is played back according to the respective channel number.
1 Press PURE to select "Auto". Auto surround playback begins.

0 In Direct and Pure Direct sound modes, the following items cannot be adjusted.
0 Dialog Enhancer (v p. 133) 0 Tone (v p. 135) 0 Restorer (v p. 193) 0 MultEQ® XT32 (v p. 195) 0 Dynamic EQ (v p. 196) 0 Dynamic Volume (v p. 197) 0 Dirac Live Filter (v p. 198) 0 Graphic EQ (v p. 198)

NOTE
0 When the Pure Direct mode has been selected, the display turns off after about 5 seconds.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

144

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Description of sound mode types

Dolby sound mode Sound mode type
Dolby Atmos
Dolby TrueHD Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Dolby Surround

Description
Please select this mode to play content encoded with Dolby Atmos. If you have selected a different sound mode previously, please select again this mode for Dolby Atmos content play back. It decodes Dolby Atmos content and its positioning data in real time and outputs audio from the appropriate speakers, creating natural audio images regardless of the speaker layout. Use ceiling speakers and/or Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field. An immersive audio experience can be enjoyed from traditional speaker layouts that do not employ overhead or Dolby Atmos Enabled Speakers by selecting the Speaker Virtualizer feature.
Please select this mode to play back the contents encoded with Dolby TrueHD at 192kHz/96kHz.
Please select this mode to play back the contents encoded with Dolby Digital Plus.
Please select this mode to play back the contents encoded with Dolby Digital.
This mode uses Dolby Surround Upmixer to extend various sources to natural and realistic multi channels for playback. Use ceiling speakers such as top middle speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

145

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

DTS sound mode Sound mode type
DTS Surround DTS-HD DTS:X
IMAX DTS
IMAX DTS:X

Description
This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS.
This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS-HD.
This mode can be selected when playing back content encoded with DTS:X. It decodes DTS:X content and its positioning data in real time and outputs audio from the appropriate speakers, creating natural audio images regardless of the speaker layout. Use height speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.
This mode is automatically activated when playing back IMAX Enhanced content featuring a DTS bitstream. (v p. 188) 0 When "Speaker Layout" - "Surround Back" is set to "2 spkrs", "Speaker Layout" - "Center" is set to "Yes", and sound
mode is set to "IMAX DTS", surround audio is output from the surround back speaker. Audio is not output from the surround speaker. 0 The bass information of speakers are not redirected to the subwoofer, but getting a better bass effect from front and center speakers by special algorithm of IMAX "Crossovers" of "Front" and "Center" is set to other than "Full Range".
This mode is automatically activated when playing back IMAX Enhanced content featuring a DTS:X bitstream. (v p. 188) 0 The bass information of speakers are not redirected to the subwoofer, but getting a better bass effect from front and
center speakers by special algorithm of IMAX "Crossovers" of "Front" and "Center" is set to other than "Full Range".

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

146

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Sound mode type

Description

DTS Neural:X

This mode uses DTS Neural:X Upmixer to extend various sources to natural and realistic multi channels for playback. Use height speakers such as front height speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.

DTS Virtual:Xz1z2

This mode uses DTS Virtual:X with virtual height and virtual surround processing to realize a three-dimensional sound field when the height speakers are not used.

z1 It cannot be selected when the input signal is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Atmos. z2 This can be selected when Height, Ceiling and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers are not being used.

AURO-3D sound mode

Sound mode type AURO-3D
AURO Surround

Description
This mode uses an AURO-3D decoder to create three-dimensional audio output using the Height Channel. It is ideal for playback of signals encoded as AURO-3D with a Height Channel. If signals not encoded as AURO-3D are input, an Upmixer called the Auro-Matic is used to create highly realistic three-dimensional audio output.
This mode uses an AURO-3D decoder to create Surround Sound without a Height Channel. It is ideal for playback of signals encoded as AURO-3D without a Height Channel. If signals not encoded as AURO-3D are input, an Upmixer called the Auro-Matic is used to output Surround Sound.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

147

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

MPEG-H sound mode Sound mode type
MPEG-H

Description
This mode can be selected when MPEG-H audio is being delivered, such as in TV broadcasts. With MPEG-H, you can enjoy playback of highly realistic sound according to the format it is delivered in, such as music programs with high-quality sound and movies with multi-channel audio.

PCM multi-channel sound mode

Sound mode type

Description

Multi Ch In

This mode can be selected when playing multi-channel PCM/DSD sources.

Original sound mode Sound mode type
Multi Ch Stereo Rock Arena Jazz Club Mono Movie
Video Game Matrix

Description This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from all speakers. This mode simulates the expansive sound of a live concert in an arena. This mode simulates the experience of being in an intimate jazz club. This mode works with monaural audio sources and delivers a surround sound effect. For optimum channel balance and surround sound effects, connect the monaural source to both of the front (L/R) audio inputs. This mode provides an exciting, dynamic surround sound effect with your favorite action video games. This mode adds a spacious surround sound effect with stereo music sources.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

148

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Auto sound mode Sound mode type
Auto
Stereo sound mode Sound mode type
Stereo
Direct sound mode Sound mode type
Direct Pure Direct

Description In this mode, the type of digital signal input, such as Dolby Digital, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Atmos, DTS, DTS-HD, DTS:X, DTS-ES, PCM (multi-channel) is detected, and the playback mode switches automatically to the corresponding mode. If the input signal is analog or PCM (2-channel), stereo playback is used. For Dolby Digital or DTS, the music is played back according to the respective channel number.
Description This mode plays 2-channel stereo audio with no additional surround sound processing. 0 Sound is output from the front left and right speakers, and subwoofer if connected. 0 When multi-channel signals are inputted, they are mixed down to 2-channel audio and are played back with no
additional surround sound processing.
Description This mode plays back audio as recorded in the source. This mode plays back an even higher quality sound than the "Direct" mode. The following circuits are stopped in order to further improve sound quality. 0 Display indicator circuit of the main body (display will go off.)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

149

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Sound mode that can be selected for each input signal
0 The following sound modes can be selected using the MOVIE, MUSIC and GAME buttons. 0 Adjust the sound field effect with the menu "Surround Parameter" to enjoy surround sound the way you like it. (v p. 185)

Input signal 2-channel z1

Sound mode
Stereo Dolby Surround z2z3 DTS Neural:X z2z3 DTS Virtual:X z2z4z5 AURO-3D z2z6 AURO Surround z2 z3 Multi Ch Stereo Mono Movie Rock Arena Jazz Club Matrix Video Game

MOVIE button S S S S S S S S

MUSIC button S S S S S S S
S S S

z1 2-channel also includes analog input. z2 It cannot be selected when headphones are used. z3 It cannot be selected when the speaker configuration is front speakers only. z4 It cannot be selected when a speaker configuration with any height speakers is used. z5 It cannot be selected when the input signal is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Atmos. z6 It cannot be selected when a speaker configuration without front height or front Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers is used.

Appendix
GAME button S S S S S S
S

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

150

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Input signal Multi-channel z7
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD Dolby Atmos

Sound mode
Stereo Dolby Digital Dolby Digital + Dolby Surround z2 Dolby Digital + Neural:X z2 Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus + Dolby Surround z2 z8 Dolby Digital Plus + Neural:X z2 Dolby Atmos z2 z9 Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD + Dolby Surround z2 z8 Dolby TrueHD + Neural:X z2 Dolby Atmos z2 z9 Dolby Atmos

MOVIE button S S S S S S S S S S S S S

MUSIC button S S S S S S S S S S S S S

z2 It cannot be selected when headphones are used. z7 The sound mode that can be selected differs depending on the audio format of the input signal and the number of channels. z8 This can be selected when the input signal does not contain Dolby Atmos. z9 This can be selected when the input signal contains Dolby Atmos.

Appendix
GAME button S S S S S S S S S S S S S

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

151

Remote

Index

Multi-channel z7

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Input signal DTS
DTS-HD DTS:X IMAX DTS IMAX DTS:X

Sound mode
DTS Surround DTS + Dolby Surround z2 DTS + Neural:X z2 DTS + Virtual:X z2 z4 DTS-HD DTS-HD + Dolby Surround z2 DTS-HD + Neural:X z2 DTS-HD + Virtual:X z2 z4
DTS:X DTS:X + Virtual:X z2z4 IMAX DTS z2z10 IMAX DTS + Neural:X z2z10 IMAX DTS + Virtual:X z2z4z10 IMAX DTS:X z2z10 IMAX DTS:X + Virtual:X z2z4z10

MOVIE button S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S

MUSIC button S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S

GAME button S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S

z2 It cannot be selected when headphones are used. z4 It cannot be selected when a speaker configuration with any height speakers is used. z7 The sound mode that can be selected differs depending on the audio format of the input signal and the number of channels. z10 Selectable when "Surround Parameter" - "IMAX" is set to "Auto" in the menu. When "IMAX" is set to "Off", playback is normal DTS or DTS:X. (v p. 188)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

152

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Input signal PCM multi-channel MPEG-H
Multi-channel z7

Sound mode
Multi Ch In Multi Ch In 7.1 z2 Multi In + Dolby Surround z2 Multi Ch In + Neural:X z2 Multi In + Virtual:X z2 z4 MPEG-H AURO-3D z2 z6 z11 AURO Surround z2 z4z11 Multi Ch Stereo Mono Movie z12 Rock Arena z12 Jazz Club z12 Matrix z12 Video Game z12

MOVIE button S S S S S S S S S S

MUSIC button S S S S S S S S S
S S S

z2 It cannot be selected when headphones are used. z4 It cannot be selected when a speaker configuration with any height speakers is used. z6 It cannot be selected when a speaker configuration without front height or front Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers is used. z7 The sound mode that can be selected differs depending on the audio format of the input signal and the number of channels. z11 It cannot be selected when the input signal is Dolby Atmos, DTS:X and MPEG-H. z12 It cannot be selected when the input signal is MPEG-H.

Appendix
GAME button S S S S S S S S
S

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

153

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

o Views on the display

Playback

Settings

A Shows a decoder to be used. 0 In the case of the Dolby Digital Plus decoder, "

" is displayed.

B Shows a decoder that creates sound output.

0 "

" indicates that the Dolby Surround decoder is being used.

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

154

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

HDMI Control function
A recent addition to the HDMI standard is CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), which allows control signals from one device to communicate with another device via the HDMI cable connection.
Setting procedure

1 Enable the HDMI Control function of this unit. Set "HDMI Control" to "On". (v p. 202)
2 Turn the power on for all the devices connected by HDMI cable.
3 Set the HDMI Control function for all devices connected by HDMI cable. 0 Please consult the operating instructions for the connected devices to check the settings. 0 Carry out steps 2 and 3 should any of the devices be unplugged.
4 Switch the television input to the HDMI input connected to this unit.

5 Switch the input source of this unit to check that video from the player connected by HDMI is played back correctly.
6 When you turn the TV's power to standby, check that the power of this unit also goes to standby.
NOTE 0 Some functions may not operate depending on the connected TV or player. Check
the owner's manual of each device for details beforehand. 0 The HDMI ZONE2 function is not compatible with the HDMI Control function. 0 When the HDMI ZONE2 function is used with "HDMI Control" in the menu set to
"On", the HDMI ZONE2 function may not fully work.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

155

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Sleep timer function

Playback

MAIN ZONE2

ZONE3

Settings

Tips

Appendix

You can have the power automatically switched to standby once a set time has elapsed. This is convenient for viewing and listening while going to sleep. The sleep timer function can be set for each zone.

SLEEP

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

156

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Using the sleep timer
1 Press MAIN, ZONE2 or ZONE3 to select the operating zone with the remote control. The button for the selected zone is lit.
2 Press SLEEP and display the time you want to set. 0 The B indicator lights up on the display and the sleep timer starts. 0 You can set the sleep timer in the range from 10 to 120 minutes in steps of 10 minutes.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Checking the remaining time
Press SLEEP when the sleep timer is in operation. The remaining time appears on the display.
o To cancel the sleep timer
Press SLEEP to select "Off". The B indicator on the display turns off.

0 The sleep timer setting is canceled when the unit switches to standby mode.
NOTE 0 The sleep timer function cannot turn off the power of devices connected to this
unit. To turn off the power of those connected devices, set up sleep timers on the connected devices themselves.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

157

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Quick select plus function

MAIN ZONE2

ZONE3

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Settings such as the input source, volume level and sound mode can be registered to the QUICK SELECT 1 - 4 buttons. You can simply press one of the registered QUICK SELECT buttons in subsequent playbacks to switch to the group of saved settings in a batch. By saving frequently used settings at the QUICK SELECT 1 4 buttons, you will always be able to easily call up the same playback environment. The Quick Select Plus function can be memorized for each zone.
0 The QUICK SELECT button on main unit can only be used to operate the MAIN ZONE.

QUICK SELECT 1 4

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

158

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Calling up the settings

1 Press MAIN, ZONE2 or ZONE3 to select the operating zone with the remote control.
The button for the selected zone is lit.
2 Press QUICK SELECT. The Quick Select settings registered to the button you pressed are called up.

0 The default settings for the input source are as shown below.

GMAIN ZONEH / GZONE2H / GZONE3H

Button

Input source

QUICK SELECT 1

CBL/SAT

QUICK SELECT 2

Blu-ray

QUICK SELECT 3

Media Player

QUICK SELECT 4

HEOS Music

0 Volume is not registered to Quick Select Plus in the factory default settings. See "Changing the settings" to register volume to Quick Select Plus. (v p. 160)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

159

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Changing the settings
1 Set the items below to the settings you want to register.
The following settings from A to L can be memorized for MAIN ZONE, and settings A and B can be memorized for ZONE2.
A Input source (v p. 90) B Volume (v p. 91) C Sound mode (v p. 141) D Audyssey (Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®,
Audyssey Dynamic Volume®, Audyssey LFCTM) (v p. 195) E "Dirac Live" (v p. 198) F "Restorer" (v p. 193) G "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)" (v p. 134) H "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)" (v p. 138) I "All Zone Stereo" (v p. 139) J "Speaker Preset" (v p. 140) K "HDMI Video Output" (v p. 205) L "TV Audio sharing settings" (v p. 161)

2 Press MAIN, ZONE2 or ZONE3 to select the operating zone with the remote control. The button for the selected zone is lit.
3 Press and hold the desired QUICK SELECT until "Quickz Memory", "Z2 Quickz Memory" or "Z3 Quickz Memory" appears on the display. The current settings will be memorized. z is displayed the number for the QUICK SELECT button you pressed.
o Changing setting items in Quick Select
You can change the MAIN ZONE Quick Select names displayed on the TV screen or this unit's display and saved setting items. See "Quick Select" in the menu for details on how to make these changes. (v p. 270)

0 Press and hold QUICK SELECT while a radio station is being received is being played back with any of the following sources, the current radio station is memorized.
0 Tuner / Internet Radio Station / Spotify

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

160

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o TV Audio sharing settings
You can enjoy the same content as the MAIN ZONE in ZONE2 or ZONE3 while maintaining surround playback of the content from TV or other playback devices in the MAIN ZONE with the original audio format such as Dolby Atmos. By saving the following settings in advance to Quick Select, you can easily call up the playback environments to be used in the MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 or ZONE3 with this function.
1 Select the input source to play back in the MAIN ZONE. 2 Press ZONE2 ON/OFF or ZONE3 ON/OFF on the main
unit to turn on the power of ZONE2 or ZONE3.
3 Press ZONE2 SOURCE or ZONE3 SOURCE on the main unit to switch the input source of ZONE2 or ZONE3 to "Source". If "Source" is selected as the input source of ZONE2 or ZONE3, the input source is changed to mirror that of the MAIN ZONE.
4 Press and hold the desired QUICK SELECT until "Quick Select* Memory" appears on the display.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

161

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Panel lock function
To prevent accidental operation of this unit, you can disable operation of the buttons on the front panel.
X INFO Cursor Up ENTER

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Disabling all key button operations
1 Press X while you press and hold STATUS and INFO with the unit in standby mode.
2 Use cursor Up/Down to select "FP/VOL LOCK On". 3 Press ENTER to enter the setting.
All button operations except X are disabled.

STATUS Cursor Down

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

162

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Disabling all button operations except VOLUME
1 Press X while you press and hold STATUS and INFO with the unit in standby mode.
2 Use cursor Up/Down to select "FP LOCK On". 3 Press ENTER to enter the setting.
All button operations except X and VOLUME are disabled.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Canceling the Panel lock function
1 Press X while you press and hold STATUS and INFO with the unit in standby mode.
2 Use cursor Up/Down to select "FP LOCK zOff". (z The currently set mode.)
3 Press ENTER to enter the setting. The Panel lock function is canceled.

0 Even when the Panel lock function is set, you can operate the unit using the remote control unit.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

163

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Remote lock function
When connecting an IR receiver, enable the Remote lock function. When the function is enabled, you can not perform operations with the remote control unit. By default, this function is disabled.
X INFO Cursor Up ENTER

STATUS Cursor Down

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Disabling the sensor function of the remote control unit
1 Press X while you press and hold STATUS and INFO with the unit in standby mode.
2 Use cursor Up/Down to select "RC LOCK On". 3 Press ENTER to enter the setting.
The infrared light receiving function is disabled.
Enabling the remote sensor function
1 Press X while you press and hold STATUS and INFO with the unit in standby mode.
2 Use cursor Up/Down to select "RC LOCK zOff". (z The currently set mode.)
3 Press ENTER to enter the setting. Infrared light receiving function on the main unit is enabled.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

164

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Web control function

You can control and configure this unit from a web control screen on a web browser.

Router

This unit

Tablet

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Controlling the unit from a web control

The web control screen supports the following functions. A Setup Menu B Power ON/OFF for each zone C MAIN ZONE input source switching
Web control screen Top menu

q
Setup Menu Audio Video Inputs Speakers Network HEOS Account General

Denon XXXXXXXXXX

Denon XXXXXXXXXX
MAIN ZONE CBL/SAT
ZONE2 Source
ZONE3 Source

0 This unit and the PC or tablet need to be connected correctly to the network in order to use the web control function. (v p. 84)
0 Depending on the settings of your security-related software, you may not be able to access this unit from your PC. If this is the case, then change the settings of the security-related software.

MAIN ZONE

CBL/SAT

Advanced

0 Audyssey Setup is not supported on the web control screen. If you wish to perform measurement, perform measurement from the on-screen Setup Menu.
0 "Advanced" contains settings for use by custom installers and should not be used at any other time.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

165

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

1 Switch the "Network Control" setting to "Always On". (v p. 257)
2 Check the IP address of this unit with "Information". (v p. 253)

Network/Information
Friendly Name Connection SSID DHCP IP Address MAC Address (Ethernet) MAC Address (Wi-Fi)

Denon AVR-X6800H Wireless (Wi-Fi) SSID-01 On 192.168.100.19 000000-000000 000000-000000

Checking the IP address.

Displays the current network settings of the AVR.

3 Open a web browser on a PC or tablet.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

4 Enter the IP address of this unit in browser's address box.
For example, if the IP address of this unit is "192.168.100.19", enter "http://192.168.100.19".

http://192.168.100.19 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help

5 When the top menu is displayed on the web browser, click on the menu item you want to operate.

Setup Menu Audio Video Inputs Speakers Network HEOS Account General

Denon XXXXXXXXXX
Denon XXXXXXXXXX
MAIN ZONE CBL/SAT
ZONE2 Source ZONE3 Source

MAIN ZONE

CBL/SAT

Advanced

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

166

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Another room)
You can operate this unit to enjoy video and audio in a room (ZONE2 and ZONE3) that is different from the room where this unit is placed (MAIN ZONE). 0 You can simultaneously play back the same source in both the MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3. 0 You can also play back separate sources in the MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3.
o Connecting ZONE (v p. 168)
"Connection 1 : Connection through the HDMI ZONE2 connector" (v p. 168) "Connection 2 : Connection using a speaker output terminal" (v p. 169) "Connection 3 : Connection through the external power amplifiers" (v p. 172)
o Playback the source in ZONE2/ZONE3 (v p. 173)
"Playing the same source simultaneously in MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3 (TV Audio Sharing setting)" (v p. 173) "Playing different sources in MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3" (v p. 175)
o Adjusting the Volume in ZONE2/ZONE3 (v p. 177)
"Adjusting the volume" (v p. 177) "Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting)" (v p. 177)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

167

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Connecting ZONE
o Connection 1 : Connection through the HDMI ZONE2 connector
When a TV is connected to the HDMI ZONE2 OUT connector, you can play back a video or audio from the device connected to the HDMI 1 7 IN connector in ZONE2 (HDMI ZONE2 function).

MAIN ZONE

ZONE2

This unit

HDMI ZONE2

HDMI

0 When a TV is connected to the HDMI ZONE2 OUT connector, and the MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 are set to the same input source, the MAIN ZONE audio may be mixed down to 2-channel audio.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

168

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

o Connection 2 : Connection using a speaker output terminal
When "Amp Assign" in the menu is set to any of the following audio is output from speakers in ZONE2 or ZONE3. (v p. 226)

Appendix

0 The connectors for connecting the ZONE2 and ZONE3 speakers depends on your MAIN ZONE Speaker Layout. Check the connectors under ZONE2 and ZONE3 in Speaker Layout.

n Amp Assign: 9.1ch + ZONE2

n Amp Assign: 9.1ch + ZONE3

MAIN ZONE This unit

ZONE2

MAIN ZONE This unit

ZONE3

(L)

(R)

w qw q

(L)

(R)

w qw q

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

169

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

n Amp Assign: 9.1ch + ZONE2/3-MONO

MAIN ZONE This unit

Settings ZONE2
wq

Tips ZONE3
wq

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

170

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

n Amp Assign: 7.1ch + ZONE2/3

MAIN ZONE This unit

Settings

Tips

Appendix

ZONE2

ZONE3

(L)

(R)

w qw q

(L)

(R)

w qw q

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

171

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Connection 3 : Connection through the external power amplifiers
The audio signals of this unit's ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output connectors are played on the ZONE2 and ZONE3 power amplifiers.

MAIN ZONE This unit

ZONE2

ZONE3

Power amplifier

AUX IN

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

172

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playback the source in ZONE2/ZONE3
o Playing the same source simultaneously in MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3 (TV Audio Sharing setting)
The TV Audio Sharing setting of this unit can be used to output all signals from ZONE2 and ZONE3 by setting "Source" as the input source for ZONE2 and ZONE3. When playing audio input from a TV via the ARC or eARC or audio input from a playback device, you can enjoy the original input audio format, such as Dolby Atmos, in surround sound in MAIN ZONE while playing the same content in ZONE2 and ZONE3.

0 Only the controls on the main unit can be used to set "Source" as the input source.
ZONE2 ON/OFF ZONE3 ON/OFF

1 Select the input source to play back in the MAIN ZONE. 2 Press ZONE2 ON/OFF or ZONE3 ON/OFF on the main
unit to turn on the power of ZONE2 or ZONE3. The j indicator on the display lights.

ZONE2 SOURCE ZONE3 SOURCE

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

173

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

3 Press ZONE2 SOURCE or ZONE3 SOURCE on the main unit to switch the input source of ZONE2 or ZONE3 to "Source".
If "Source" is selected as the input source of ZONE2 or ZONE3, the input source is changed to mirror that of the MAIN ZONE. "Source" is the default setting.
0 The following audio signals can be played in ZONE2 and ZONE3.

Input

Output

ZONE2

ZONE3

Digital Audio (HDMI)

Digital Audio (Coaxial/Optical)

Analog Audio

USB

HEOS Music

TUNER

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

174

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Playing different sources in MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3

ZONE2 ZONE3
Input source select buttons

POWER X

1 Press ZONE2 or ZONE3 to select the operating zone with the remote control. The button for the selected zone is lit.
2 Press POWER X to turn on the ZONE2 or ZONE3 power. The j indicator on the display lights. 0 Power in ZONE2 or ZONE3 can be turned on or off by pressing ZONE2 ON/OFF or ZONE3 ON/OFF on the main unit.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

175

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

3 Press the input source select button to select the input source to be played.
The audio signal of the selected source is output to ZONE2 or ZONE3.
0 To perform an operation with the main unit, press ZONE2 SOURCE or ZONE3 SOURCE. Each time you press ZONE2 SOURCE or ZONE3 SOURCE, the input source changes.
0 The following audio signals can be played in ZONE2 and ZONE3.

Input

Output

ZONE2

ZONE3

Digital Audio (HDMI)

Sz1

Digital Audio (Coaxial/Optical)

Sz2

Analog Audio

USB

HEOS Music

TUNER

z1 To play an HDMI signal other than PCM 2-channel in ZONE2, set "HDMI Audio" to "PCM". (v p. 268)
z2 Only a 2-channel PCM signal is supported.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

176

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Adjusting the Volume in ZONE2/ZONE3

ZONE2 ZONE3

MUTE :

VOLUME df

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Adjusting the volume
1 Press ZONE2 or ZONE3 to select the operating zone with the remote control. The button for the selected zone is lit.
2 Use VOLUME df to adjust the volume. 0 At time of purchase, "Volume Limit" is set to "70 (10 dB)". (v p. 268)
0 Turn MASTER VOLUME after pressing ZONE2 SOURCE or ZONE3 SOURCE on the main unit to adjust the volume.
o Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting)
1 Press ZONE2 or ZONE3 to select the operating zone with the remote control. The button for the selected zone is lit.
2 Press MUTE :. The sound is reduced to the level set at "Mute Level" in the menu. (v p. 269) 0 To cancel mute, either adjust the sound volume or press MUTE : again.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

177

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Menu map

When using menu operations, connect this unit to a TV and operate this unit while viewing the TV. The recommended settings are configured for this unit by default. You can customize this unit based on your existing system and your preferences.

Setting items

Detailed items

Description

Page

Subwoofer Level Adjust Adjusts the subwoofer channel volume for all input sources.

184

Bass Sync

Synchronizes the timing of the low frequency sound.

184

Surround Parameter

Adjusts surround sound parameters.

185

Audio

Restorer

Expands the low and high frequency components of compressed audio content such as

193

MP3 files to enable richer audio playback.

Volume

Sets the MAIN ZONE (room where the unit is located) volume setting.

194

Audyssey

Makes Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic

195

Volume® and Audyssey LFCTM settings.

Dirac Live

Select a Dirac Live filter.

198

Graphic EQ

Adjusts the tonal quality for each speaker using a graphic equalizer.

198

HDMI Setup

Makes settings for HDMI Audio Out, HDMI Pass Through and HDMI Control settings.

200

Output Settings

Makes settings for video output.

205

On-Screen Display

Selects the on-screen display user interface preferences.

206

Screensaver

Sets the screen saver setting.

207

Video

4K/8K Signal Format

Sets signal format options for your 4K or 8K video equipment.

208

HDCP Setup

Sets the HDCP version for each HDMI input source.

209

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

178

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Setting items Inputs

Detailed items Input Assign Source Rename Hide Sources Source Level
Audyssey® Setup

Manual Setup

Speakers Network

Dirac Live Setup
Information Connection Settings Network Control Friendly Name Diagnostics AirPlay Spotify Connect Wi-Fi and Bluetooth

Description Changes input connector assignment and the audio input mode. Changes the display name for input source. Selects source inputs to hide on the user interface and front panel displays. Adjusts the input level for the current source.
The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and listening room are measured and the optimum settings are made automatically. Sets up the speakers manually or changes Audyssey® Setup, Dirac Live® Room Correction settings. Displays information about using Dirac Live Room Calibration.
Displays network information. Configures the network connection. Configures the network settings (DHCP and IP address). Enables network communication in standby power mode. Edits the name of this unit that is displayed on the network. Tests the network connection. Settings for Apple AirPlay. Toggles access to Spotify Connect. Toggles power to the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth radios.

Page 210 213 213 214
215
226
252 253 253 256 257 258 258 259 260 260

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

179

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Setting items HEOS

Detailed items

Description

[When the user is signed out of the HEOS account]

A guidance to download the HEOS app.

[When the user is signed in to the HEOS account]

Signed in as

Displays your HEOS account.

Tips

Appendix Page 261 261

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

180

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Setting items General

Detailed items Language Owner's Manual ECO Bluetooth Transmitter ZONE2 Setup/ ZONE3 Setup Zone Rename Quick Select Trigger Out 1/ Trigger Out 2/ Trigger Out 3 Front Display Firmware

Information Usage Data Save & Load Setup Lock Reset

Description Selects the language for the on-screen user interface. Access the online Owner's Manual from your mobile device. Configures the ECO Mode and Auto Standby energy-saving functions. Sets Bluetooth transmitter settings. Makes settings for audio playback with ZONE2 and ZONE3.
Changes the display title of each zone to one you prefer. Sets the "Quick Select" parameters and display name. Select the conditions for activating trigger out function.

Page 262 262 262 266 267
269 270 271

Makes settings related to the display on this unit.

271

Checks for the latest firmware information about updates and updates the firmware, and

272

sets up the notification message display.

Shows information about this unit settings, input signals, etc.

274

Selects whether or not to send anonymous usage data to Denon.

276

Save and restore device settings by using a USB memory device.

276

Protects settings from inadvertent changes.

277

Various settings are reset to the factory default values.

277

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

181

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Setting items

Detailed items

Begin Setup...

Language Select Speaker Setup Setup Assistant Speaker Calibration Network Setup TV Audio Setup Input Setup Mobile Apps

Description
Performs basic installation/connections/settings from the beginning according to the guidance indicated on the TV screen.
Sets individual setting items according to the guidance displayed on the TV screen.

Page
Page 9 of the separate manual "Quick Start Guide"

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

182

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

MAIN

Cursor Up/Down/ Left/Right
BACK

ENTER SETUP

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Menu operations
1 Press MAIN on the remote control unit to set the operating zone to the MAIN ZONE. The MAIN button lights.
2 Press SETUP. The menu is displayed on the TV screen.
3 Use cursor Up/Down/Right to select the menu to be set or operated, then press ENTER.
4 Use cursor Left/Right to change to desired setting. 5 Press ENTER to enter the setting.
0 To return to the previous item, press BACK. 0 Exiting the menu, press SETUP while the menu is displayed. The
menu display disappears.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

183

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Audio
Make audio-related settings.

Subwoofer Level Adjust
Adjusts the subwoofer channel volume for all input sources.
o Subwoofer 1 / Subwoofer 2 / Subwoofer 3 / Subwoofer 4
Adjusts the volume level for the Subwoofer 1, 2, 3 and 4. 12.0 dB +12.0 dB (Default: 0.0 dB)
0 This setting is also reflected in the subwoofer channel level in the "Speakers" "Levels" menu settings. (v p. 243)
0 The name of the subwoofer changes depending on the configuration of "Subwoofer Mode" (v p. 236) and "Subwoofer Layout" (v p. 236).

Bass Sync
For contents recorded in multi-channel such as Blu-ray discs, the recorded low frequency effects (LFE) may be out of synch and delayed. This function corrects such a delay of low frequency effects (LFE).
0 ms 16 ms (Default : 0 ms)
0 How low frequency effects (LFE) are delayed differ according to the disc. Set this to the desired value.
0 "Bass Sync" settings are stored for each input source. 0 This can be set when the LFE signal is included in the input signal.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

184

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Surround Parameter
You can adjust the surround audio sound field effects to match your preferences. The items (parameters) that can be adjusted depend on the signal being input and the currently set sound mode.

0 Some setting items cannot be set while playback is stopped. Make the settings during playback.
0 "Surround Parameter" settings are stored for each sound mode.

o Cinema EQ

Gently softens the upper treble range of movie soundtracks to reduce possible harshness and improve clarity.

On:
Off (Default):

"Cinema EQ" is used. "Cinema EQ" is not used.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Loudness Management

This sets whether to output as specified in "Dynamic Compression" or output directly without compressing the dynamic range of audio recorded in the disc.

On (Default):
Off:

Outputs are given based on enabling the settings made in "Dynamic Compression" and Dialogue normalization function.
"Dynamic Compression" settings and Dialogue normalization are disabled, and the signals on the disc are output as is.

0 "Loudness Management" can be set when Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and Dolby Atmos signal is input.

0 This item cannot be set when sound mode is "Direct", "Pure Direct", "Stereo" and "Original sound mode".

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

185

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Dynamic Compression

Compress dynamic range (difference between loud and soft sounds).

Auto:
Low / Medium / High: Off (Default):

Automatic dynamic range compression on/off control according to source.
These set the compression level.
Dynamic range compression is always off.

0 "Dynamic Compression" can be set when Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos or DTS signal is input.
0 "Auto" cannot be set when inputting a DTS signal.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Dialog Control
Adjust the volume of dialog in movies, vocals in music, etc. so these can be heard more easily.
0 6 (Default : 0)

0 This can be set when a DTS:X signal that is compatible with the Dialog Control function is input.
o Low Frequency Effects
Adjust the low frequency effects level (LFE).
-10 dB 0 dB (Default: 0 dB)

0 This can be set when the LFE signal is included in the input signal. 0 This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal or DVD-Audio is
played. 0 For proper playback of the different sources, we recommend setting to the
values below.
0 Dolby Digital sources: 0 dB 0 DTS movie sources: 0 dB 0 DTS music sources: -10 dB

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

186

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Speaker Virtualizer

The Speaker Virtualizer enhances the surround and height speaker channels to create an enveloping virtual surround effect.

On (Default):
Off:

Enables "Speaker Virtualizer". Disables "Speaker Virtualizer".

0 You can set this when the sound mode is "Dolby Atmos", "Dolby Surround" or sound mode that has "+Dolby Surround" in the sound mode name.
0 Usable when not using height, ceiling or Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers, or when not using surround speakers.
0 Audio is not output from the surround back speaker if "Speaker Virtualizer" is set to "On" when "Speaker Layout" - "Surround Back" is set to "1 spkr" in the menu.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Center Spread

Center Spread expands the center channel signal to left and right front speakers to create a wider frontal audio image for the listener. It is optimized and designed primary for playback of stereo music content.

On:
Off (Default):

Use "Center Spread". Do not use "Center Spread".

0 You can set this when sound mode is "Dolby Surround".

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

187

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o DTS Neural:X

DTS Neural:X Expands the non-object based audio signals and optimizes them for your speaker configuration.

On (Default):
Off:

Use "DTS Neural:X". Do not use "DTS Neural:X".

0 You can set this when sound mode is "DTS:X".
o IMAX

Sets the audio mode for IMAX playback.

Auto (Default):
Off:

Automatically enables IMAX mode when IMAX content is detected.
Disables IMAX mode.

0 This setting cannot be set when headphones are used.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o IMAX Audio Settings

You can configure special IMAX audio settings to recreate the conditions of an IMAX theater.

Auto (Default):
Manual:

Applies the optimized speaker settings to reproduce similar to the IMAX theater environment.
Manually adjusts the "High Pass Filter", "Low Pass Filter" and "Subwoofer Output".

0 You can set this when sound mode is "IMAX DTS" or "IMAX DTS:X". 0 "Speakers" - "Crossovers", "Bass" - "Subwoofer Output" and "LPF for LFE" in
the menu cannot be applied during IMAX playback.
o High Pass Filter
Set the high pass filter cutoff frequency for all speakers during IMAX playback.
40 Hz / 60 Hz / 80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 180 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default: 80 Hz)

0 You can set this when "IMAX Audio Settings" is set to "Manual".

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

188

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Low Pass Filter
Set the low pass filter cutoff frequency of the LFE signal during IMAX playback.
80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 180 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default: 120 Hz)

0 You can set this when "IMAX Audio Settings" is set to "Manual".

o Subwoofer Output

Set the bass signal to be played by the subwoofer during IMAX playback.

LFE + Main:
LFE (Default):

The low range signal of all speakers is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer. The LFE signal and the bass component of each speaker is played.
Only the LFE signal is played.

0 You can set this when "IMAX Audio Settings" is set to "Manual".

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Auro-Matic Preset
Selects the Auro-Matic Preset for fine tuning the AURO-3D experience to specific audio material.

Small: Medium (Default): Large:
Movie:
Speech:

"Small" is ideal for pop and chamber music.
"Medium" is ideal on jazz music or typical movies and TV shows.
"Large" is ideal for recordings that were recorded in large spaces (e.g. orchestral recording).
"Movie" is ideal for experiencing a largecinema effect for watching movies (e.g. action movies with big explosions).
"Speech" is ideal for recordings which are mostly dialog (e.g. news broadcast), and that have virtually no inherent spatial information.

0 You can set this when the sound mode is set to "AURO-3D" or "AURO Surround".
0 This cannot be set if the input signal contains AURO-3D signals containing a Height channel.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

189

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Auro-Matic Strength
Changes the level of the up-mixed channels in relation to the original input signal. The value ranges from 0 (no up-mixing) to 15 (Maximum level, providing maximum effect).
0 - 15 (Default:12)

0 You can set this when the sound mode is set to "AURO-3D" or "AURO Surround".
0 This cannot be set if the input signal contains AURO-3D signals containing a Height channel.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o AURO-3D Mode
Select how to output sound to all speakers when AURO-3D decoding is active.

Channel Expansion (Default):
Direct:

Incoming AURO-3D content is expanded to additional speakers. All speakers configured for AURO-3D will output sound.
Incoming AURO-3D content is sent directly to each corresponding channel. No content is sent to additional speakers.

0 You can set this when the input signal contains AURO-3D signal and sound mode is set to AURO-3D.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

190

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

o Delay Time
Adjusts delay time for surround channels. 0 ms 300 ms (Default: 30 ms)

Playback

0 You can set this when the sound mode is "Matrix".
o Effect Level
Adjust the sound effect level of the current sound mode. 1 15 (Default: 10)

0 This item can be set when sound mode is "Rock Arena", "Jazz Club", "Mono Movie" and "Video Game".
0 Set to a lower level if the positioning and sense of phase of the surround signals seems unnatural.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Room Size

Determine size of acoustic environment.

Small: Medium small: Medium (Default): Medium large: Large:

Simulate acoustics of a small room. Simulate acoustics of a medium-small room.
Simulate acoustics of a medium room.
Simulate acoustics of a medium-large room. Simulate acoustics of a large room.

0 This item can be set when sound mode is "Rock Arena", "Jazz Club", "Mono Movie" and "Video Game".
0 "Room Size" does not indicate the size of the room in which sources are played.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

191

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Speaker Select

Selects which speakers output sound, depending on the current sound mode.

Floor:
Floor & Height (Default):

Plays back without height speakers. Plays back with height speakers.

o Subwoofer

Turn subwoofer output on and off.

On (Default):
Off:

The subwoofer is used. The subwoofer is not used.

0 This can be set when the sound mode is the original sound mode.

0 You can set this when the sound mode is "Direct" or "Stereo" and in the menu "Subwoofer Output" is set to "LFE + Main". (v p. 246)
o Set Defaults
The "Surround Parameter" settings are returned to the default settings.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

192

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Restorer

Compressed audio formats such as MP3 and WMA (Windows Media Audio) reduce the amount of data by eliminating signal components that are hard for the human ear to hear. The "Restorer" function generates the signals eliminated upon compression, restoring the sound to conditions near those of the original sound before compression. It also restores the original bass characteristics for a rich and expanded tonal range.
o Mode

High:
Medium:
Low: Off (Default):

Optimized mode for compressed sources with very weak highs (64 kbps and under).
Apply suitable bass and treble boost for all compressed sources (96 kbps and under).
Optimized mode for compressed sources with normal highs (96 kbps and over).
Do not use "Restorer".

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 This item can be set with analog signals or PCM signal (Sample Rate = 44.1/48 kHz) is input.
0 This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to "Direct" or "Pure Direct". 0 "Restorer" settings are stored for each input source.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

193

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Volume

Set the MAIN ZONE (room where the unit is located) volume setting.

o Scale

Set how volume is displayed.

0 - 98 (Default):
-79.5 dB - 18.0 dB:

Display in the range 0 (Min) to 98.
Display ---dB (Min), in the range 79.5 dB to 18.0 dB.

0 "Scale" settings are reflected in all the zones.
o Limit
Make a setting for maximum volume. 60 80 (20 dB 0 dB) Off (Default)

0 The dB value is displayed when the "Scale" setting is "-79.5 dB - 18.0 dB". (v p. 194)

o Power On Level

Sets the initial volume level when the power is turned on.

Last (Default):
Mute:
1 98 (79 dB 18 dB) :

Sets the power-on level to the last-used volume level.
Sets the power-on level to mute level.
Sets a specific power-on level.

0 The dB value is displayed when the "Scale" setting is "-79.5 dB - 18.0 dB". (v p. 194)
o Mute Level

Set the amount of attenuation when mute is on.

Full (Default): 40 dB :
20 dB :

Sets the mute level to full mute (no sound).
Sets the mute level to 40 dB lower than the current volume level.
Sets the mute level to 20 dB lower than the current volume level.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

194

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Audyssey®
Set Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and Audyssey LFCTM. These can be selected after Audyssey® Setup has been performed. For additional information on Audyssey technology, please see "Explanation of terms" (v p. 326).

0 "MultEQ® XT32", "Dynamic EQ", "Reference Level Offset", "Dynamic Volume", "Audyssey LFCTM" and "Containment Amount" settings are stored for each input source.
0 When the sound mode is in the "Direct" or "Pure Direct" mode, "MultEQ® XT32", "Dynamic EQ", "Dynamic Volume" and "Audyssey LFCTM" settings cannot be configured.
0 When the sound mode is in "DTS Virtual:X" or sound mode that have "+Virtual:X" in the sound mode name, "Dynamic EQ", "Dynamic Volume" and "Audyssey LFCTM" settings cannot be configured.
0 This item cannot be selected when a DTS:X format with a sampling frequency of over 48 kHz is input.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o MultEQ® XT32

MultEQ® XT32 compensates for both time and frequency characteristics of the listening area based on Audyssey® Setup measurement results. Selection is done from three types of compensation curves. We recommend the "Reference" setting.

Reference (Default): L/R Bypass:
Flat: Off:

Selects the default calibrated setting with a slight roll off at high frequencies. Optimal for movies.
Selects the reference setting, but bypasses MultEQ® XT32 on the front left and right speakers.
Selects the calibrated setting which is optimized for small rooms where your listening position is closer to the speakers.
Do not use "MultEQ® XT32".

0 When using headphones, "MultEQ® XT32" is automatically set to "Off".

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

195

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Dynamic EQ

Solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and room acoustics.
Works with MultEQ® XT32.

On (Default):
Off:

Use "Dynamic EQ". Do not use "Dynamic EQ".

0 When the menu "Dynamic EQ" setting is "On", it is not possible to do "Tone" adjustment. (v p. 135)
0 This item cannot be set when "MultEQ® XT32" in the menu is set to "Off".

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Reference Level Offset

Audyssey Dynamic EQ® is referenced to the standard film mix level. It makes adjustments to maintain the reference response and surround envelopment when the volume is turned down from 0 dB. However, film reference level is not always used in music or other non-film content. Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset provides three offsets from the film level reference (5 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB) that can be selected when the mix level of the content is not within the standard. Recommended setting levels for content are shown below.

0 dB (Film Reference) (Default): 5 dB : 10 dB :
15 dB :

Optimized for content such as movies.
Select this setting for content that has a very wide dynamic range, such as classical music. Select this setting for jazz or other music that has a wider dynamic range. This setting should also be selected for TV content as that is usually mixed at 10 dB below film reference. Select this setting for pop/rock music or other program material that is mixed at very high listening levels and has a compressed dynamic range.

0 Setting is enabled when "Dynamic EQ" is "On". (v p. 196)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

196

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Dynamic Volume

Solves the problem of large variations in volume level between TV, movies and other content (between quiet passages and loud passages, etc.) by automatically adjusting to the user's preferred volume setting.
Works with MultEQ® XT32.

Heavy:
Medium:
Light: Off (Default):

Most adjustment to softest and loudest sounds. Medium adjustment to loudest and softest sound. Least adjustment to loudest and softest sounds.
Do not use "Dynamic Volume".

0 If "Dynamic Volume" is set to "Yes" in "Audyssey® Setup", the setting is automatically changed to "Medium". (v p. 215)
0 This item cannot be set when "MultEQ® XT32" in the menu is set to "Off".

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Audyssey LFCTM

Adjusts the low frequency band to prevent bass and vibration from being conveyed to neighboring rooms.
Works with MultEQ® XT32.

On:
Off (Default):

Use "Audyssey LFCTM". Do not use "Audyssey LFCTM".

0 This item cannot be set when "MultEQ® XT32" in the menu is set to "Off".
o Containment Amount
Adjusts the amount of low frequency containment. Use higher settings if you have close neighbors. 1 7 (Default : 4)

0 This can be set when "Audyssey LFCTM" in the menu is set to "On".

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

197

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Dirac Live
o Filter
Set a Dirac Live filter. This can be set after running Dirac Live Room Correction. See the Dirac Live Manual for details. https://manuals.denon.com/DiracLive/ALL/EN

0 A Dirac Live license needs to be purchased to use Dirac Live. (v p. 252)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Graphic EQ
Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker.

0 Speakers for which "Graphic EQ" can be set differ according to the sound mode. 0 This can be set when "MultEQ® XT32" setting is "Off". (v p. 195)
0 This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to "Direct" or "Pure Direct". 0 If you are using headphones, you can set the equalizer for headphones.
(v p. 198)

o Graphic EQ / Headphone EQ

Set whether to use the graphic equalizer or not.

On:
Off (Default):

Use the graphic equalizer. Do not use the graphic equalizer.

0 "Headphone EQ" is set in the menu when headphones are used.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

198

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Speaker Selection

Select whether to adjust tones for individual speakers or for all speakers.

All:
Left/Right (Default):
Each:

Adjust all speaker tones together.
Adjust the left and right speaker tones together.
Adjust the tone for each speaker.

o Adjust EQ
Adjust tonal balance for each frequency band.
1. Select the speaker. 2. Select the adjustment frequency band.
63 Hz / 125 Hz / 250 Hz / 500 Hz / 1 kHz / 2 kHz / 4 kHz / 8 kHz / 16 kHz 3. Adjust the level. 20.0 dB +6.0 dB (Default: 0.0 dB)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Curve Copy
Copy the Flat correction curve created in Audyssey® Setup.

0 "Curve Copy" is displayed after Audyssey® Setup has been performed. 0 "Curve Copy" cannot be used when using headphones.
o Set Defaults
The "Graphic EQ" settings are returned to the default settings.

0 Front Dolby, Surround Dolby and Back Dolby speakers can only be set when 63 Hz/125 Hz/250 Hz/500 Hz/1 kHz.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

199

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Video
Make video-related settings.

HDMI Setup
Make settings for HDMI Audio Out, HDMI Pass Through and HDMI Control settings.
NOTE 0 When "HDMI Pass Through" and "HDMI Control" is set to "On", it consumes more
standby power. ("HDMI Pass Through" (v p. 200), "HDMI Control" (v p. 202)) If you are not using this unit for an extended period, it is recommended that you unplug the power cord from the power outlet.

o HDMI Audio Out

Selects the audio output speakers.

AVR (Default):
TV:

Play back through speakers connected to the unit.
Play back through TV connected to the unit.

o HDMI Pass Through

Selects how this unit will transmit HDMI signals to the HDMI output in standby power mode.

On (Default):
Off:

Transmits the selected HDMI input through this unit's HDMI output when this unit is in standby power mode.
No HDMI signals are transmitted through this unit's HDMI output in standby power mode.

0 When the HDMI Control function is activated, priority is given to the TV audio setting. (v p. 155)
0 When the power of this unit is on and "HDMI Audio Out" is set to "TV", audio is output as 2-channel from the HDMI OUT connector.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

200

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Pass Through Source

Selects the HDMI input to pass through the HDMI output when this unit is in standby power mode.

Last:

Selects the last used HDMI input.

CBL/SAT / Media Player /

Blu-ray / Game1 /
Game2 / AUX1 / AUX2 / TV Audio / CDz

Selects the HDMI input as the standby source.

(Default : CBL/SAT):

z"Pass Through Source" can be set when any of the HDMI connectors is assigned to "CD" for the input source in the "Input Assign" setting. (v p. 210)

o RC Source Select

Set whether to allow this unit to be turned on by the input source select button on the remote control when this unit is in standby power mode.

Power On + Source (Default):
Source Select Only:

The power of this unit is turned on and the input source changes.
This unit remains in standby but switches the HDMI input source when you press an input source button. The power display of this unit blinks when the input source select button of the remote control is pressed.

0 "Pass Through Source" can be set when "HDMI Control" is set to "On" or "HDMI Pass Through" is set to "On". ("HDMI Pass Through" (v p. 200), "HDMI Control" (v p. 202))

0 "RC Source Select" can be set when "HDMI Control" is set to "On" or "HDMI Pass Through" is set to "On". ("HDMI Pass Through" (v p. 200), "HDMI Control" (v p. 202))

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

201

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o HDMI Control

You can link operations with devices connected to HDMI and compatible with HDMI Control.

On:
Off (Default):

Use HDMI Control function. Do not use HDMI Control function.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o ARC

On the TV connected to the HDMI OUT TV 1 connector, set whether to receive sound from the TV via HDMI.

On:
Off (Default):

Use ARC function. Do not use ARC function.

0 If using the HDMI Control function, connect a TV compatible with HDMI control to the HDMI OUT TV 1 connector.
0 Please consult the operating instructions for each connected device to check the settings.
0 When "HDMI Control" is set to "On", the power to this unit can be linked to the TV power and the volume of this unit can be controlled using the TV remote control.
0 Refer to "HDMI Control function" for more information about the HDMI Control function. (v p. 155)
NOTE
0 If the "HDMI Control" settings have been changed, always reset the power to connected devices after the change.

0 If using this function, use a TV compatible with ARC (Audio Return Channel) and enable the HDMI Control function of the TV.
0 When "ARC" is set to "On", the volume of this unit can be controlled using the TV remote control even when "HDMI Control" is set to "Off" on this unit.
NOTE 0 If the "ARC" settings have been changed, always reset the power to
connected devices after the change. 0 Using an eARC function-compatible television enables audio playback from
the speaker connected to this unit, regardless of "ARC" settings in the menu.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

202

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o TV Audio Switching

Sets automatic switching to the "TV Audio" input when a TV connected via HDMI sends an appropriate CEC control command to this unit.

On (Default):
Off:

Select the "TV Audio" input automatically when receiving a command from the TV.
Do not select the "TV Audio" input automatically when receiving a command from the TV.

0 "TV Audio Switching" can be set when "HDMI Control" is set to "On". (v p. 202)

o Power Off Control

Links the power standby of this unit to external devices.

All (Default):
Video:
Off:

If power to a connected TV is turned off independently of the input source, power to this unit is automatically set to standby.
With an input source being selected that is assigned "HDMI", when you turn the power of the TV off, power to this unit is automatically set to standby. (v p. 211)
This unit does not link with power to a TV.

0 "Power Off Control" can be set when "HDMI Control" is set to "On". (v p. 202)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

203

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Power Saving

Enables the Power Saving feature of the AVR to reduce energy costs when using the TV's speakers. This function is activated in the following cases. 0 When "TV Audio" is selected as the input source of this unit 0 When playing content from a device connected by HDMI

On:
Off (Default):

Use Power Saving feature. Do not use Power Saving feature.

0 "Power Saving" can be set when "HDMI Control" is set to "On". (v p. 202)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

204

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Output Settings

Makes settings for video output.

o HDMI Video Output

Select the HDMI monitor connector to be used.

Auto(Dual) (Default):
TV 1: TV 2:

The presence of a TV connected to the HDMI OUT TV 1 or HDMI OUT TV 2 connector is detected automatically, and that TV connection is used.
A TV connected to the HDMI OUT TV 1 connector is always used.
A TV connected to the HDMI OUT TV 2 connector is always used.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Video Mode

Configure the video processing method to match the type of video content.

Auto (Default):
Game:
Movie: Bypass:

Process video automatically based on the HDMI content information.
Always process video for game content. Minimize the video delay when the video is delayed compared to the button operations on the controller of the game console.
Perform image processing that is suitable for contents other than games.
Remove all video processing from the HDMI video path.

0 If both the HDMI OUT TV 1 and HDMI OUT TV 2 connectors are connected and "HDMI Upscaler" is set to "Auto", the signals are output with a resolution that is compatible with both TVs. (v p. 206)
0 You can check which resolutions are compatible with your TV in "TV 1 Info." and "TV 2 Info.". (v p. 274)
0 When connecting multiple Dolby Vision TVs, the signal will only be optimal for one TV. A TV connected to the HDMI OUT TV 1 connector has priority.

0 If "Video Mode" is set to "Auto", the mode is switched according to the input contents.
0 Information displays such as the volume bar cannot be overlaid with the video signal when "Video Mode" is set to "Bypass".
0 This item can be set when "HDMI" is assigned for each input source. 0 This cannot be set when sound mode is set to "IMAX DTS" or "IMAX DTS:X".

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

205

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o HDMI Upscaler

Sets the mode for upscaling 1080p and 4K HDMI content to 8K.

Auto:
Off (Default):

Upscale 1080p and 4K HDMI video to 8K based on the TV's capabilities.
8K upscaler is disabled.

0 This item can be set when "HDMI" is assigned for each input source.
0 This function is not effective when the input signal is "x.v.Color", 3D, sYCC601 color, Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color, computer resolutions, compressed video or HDR.
0 This cannot be set when sound mode is set to "IMAX DTS" or "IMAX DTS:X".
0 This item can be set when "Video Mode" is set to anything other than "Bypass". (v p. 205)

On-Screen Display

Select the on-screen display user interface preferences.

o Volume

Sets where to display the volume level.

Bottom (Default):
Top:
Off:

Display at the bottom.
Display at the top. Turn display off.

0 When the master volume display is hard to see when superimposed text (closed captioning) or movie subtitles are present, set to "Top".

o Info

Displays status of operation temporarily when the input source is switched.

On (Default):

Turn display on.

Off:

Turn display off.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

206

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Now Playing

Sets the display time for the playback display when the input source is "HEOS Music" or "Tuner".

Always On (Default):
Auto Off:

Show display continuously.
Show display for 30 seconds after operation.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Screensaver

Select the screen saver setting.
A screen saver is activated if no operation is performed for more than 5 minutes when no video signal is input or when the same screen (e.g. the setup menu) is displayed.
Use cursor Up/Down/Left/Right to clear the screen saver.

On:
Off (Default):

Turns screen saver on. Turns screen saver off.

0 The screen saver is activated in the following cases.
0 When the setup menu is displayed 0 When no video signal is input 0 When the HEOS Music, USB, Bluetooth or Tuner playback screen is displayed

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

207

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

4K/8K Signal Format

Set the format of 4K and 8K signal to be played back by this unit when the TV or playback device connected to this unit is HDMI 4K or 8K signal compatible.
o 4K/8K Signal Format

Sets the signal format options for devices connected to each input on this unit.

Standard:
Enhanced (Default):
8K Enhanced:

Select if your TV and the source device support 4K 60Hz 4:2:0 8 bit video signals.
Select if your TV, the source device, and cables support high quality 4K 60Hz 4:4:4 8 bit, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0 10 bit video signals.
Select if your TV, the source device, and cables support high quality 8K 60Hz or 4K 120Hz video signals.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

GRelation between the "4K/8K Signal Format" setting and supported resolutionsH

Support Resolution

Color Space

Pixel Depth

4K/8K Signal Format

Standard

Enhanced

8K Enhanced

4K 24Hz, RGB /

8 bit

4K 30Hz, YCbCr 4:4:4 10,12 bit

4K 25Hz YCbCr 4:2:2 12 bit

8 bit

YCbCr 4:2:0

10,12 bit

4K 60Hz, 4K 50Hz RGB /

8 bit

YCbCr 4:4:4 10,12 bit

YCbCr 4:2:2 12 bit

YCbCr 4:2:0

8,10,12 bit

4K 120Hz, 4K 100Hz

RGB / YCbCr 4:4:4

8,10 bit

YCbCr 4:2:2 12 bit

8K 24Hz,

YCbCr 4:2:0

8,10,12 bit

8K 30Hz, 8K 25Hz

RGB / YCbCr 4:4:4

8,10 bit

YCbCr 4:2:2 12 bit

8K 60Hz, 8K 50Hz

YCbCr 4:2:0 8, 10 bit

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

208

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 When setting this to "Enhanced", we recommend using a "Premium High Speed HDMI Cable" or "Premium High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet" that has an "HDMI Premium Certified Cable" label attached to the product package.
0 When setting this to "8K Enhanced", we recommend using a certified "Ultra High Speed HDMI cable".
0 When this setting is "8K Enhanced", configure the television or playback device settings to match this setting.
0 When this setting is "8K Enhanced", video may not be output correctly depending on the connected playback device or HDMI cable. In this case, change this setting to "Enhanced" or "Standard".
0 "Custom" is displayed for the setting item if our service engineers or custom installers has configured the HDMI signal format for this unit.
0 "4K/8K Signal Format" can also be set by the following procedure. However, the menu screen is not displayed. Watch the display while configuring the setting.
1. Switch to the HDMI input source you want to set. 2. Press and hold the main unit's ZONE3 SOURCE and STATUS at the same
time for at least 3 seconds. "z4K/8K Format <Enhanced>" appears on the display. 3. Use cursor Left or cursor Right on the main unit to select the 4K/8K Signal Format. 4. Press the main unit's ENTER to complete the setting.

HDCP Setup

Sets the HDCP version for each HDMI input source.
Video may not be output depending on the HDCP version of your player and the TV.
If this issue occurs, use this setting to set one version of HDCP. This may be able to output video.

Auto (Default):
1.4:
2.3:

Automatically applies the HDCP version of this unit according to TV.
Fixes the HDCP version of this unit to 1.4.
Fixes the HDCP version of this unit to 2.3.

0 "Custom" is displayed for the setting item if our service engineers or custom installers has configured the HDCP version for this unit.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

209

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Inputs
Perform settings related to input source playback. You do not have to change the settings to use the unit. Make settings when needed.

Input Assign
By making connections as indicated by the input sources printed on the audio/video input connectors of this unit, you can just press one of the input source select buttons to easily play back audio or video from a connected device.
Please change the assignment of the HDMI input connector, digital audio input connector and analog audio input connector when connecting an input source that differs from that printed to the audio/video input connectors of this unit.
Sets the audio input mode for each "INPUT MODE" source. "AUTO" is normally recommended for this setting. This automatically detects and plays signal input to this unit prioritized in the following order: HDMI > DIGITAL > ANALOG.

Inputs/Input Assign

CBL/SAT Media Player Blu-ray Game1 Game2 AUX1 AUX2 TV Audio CD

[ HDMI ] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 -

Set Defaults

[ DIGITAL ] COAX1 COAX2 OPT1 OPT2

[ ANALOG ] 1 2 3 4 5 6

[ VIDEO ] VIDEO1 COMP VIDEO2
-

[ INPUT MODE ] AUTO AUTO AUTO HDMI HDMI AUTO AUTO
DIGITAL AUTO

Changes HDMI input assignments.

0 By default, each item is set as follows.

Input source

Input connector HDMI DIGITAL ANALOG

CBL/SAT

COAX1

Media Player

COAX2

Blu-ray

Game1

Game2

AUX1

AUX2

TV Audio

OPT1

OPT2

VIDEO VIDEO1 COMP VIDEO2

INPUT MODE
AUTO AUTO AUTO HDMI HDMI AUTO AUTO DIGITAL AUTO

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

210

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

n TV set top box/satellite users please note
When using the digital audio output on a TV/satellite box: To play the video signal assigned to "HDMI" combined with the audio signal assigned at "Input Assign" - "DIGITAL", you will also need to select "DIGITAL" in the "INPUT MODE".

0 The same input connector can be assigned to multiple input sources. For example, assign the same HDMI input connector to multiple sources to use each input source in combination with analog or digital audio as you prefer. In such cases, set the audio connector for playback in "INPUT MODE".

o HDMI

Set this to change the HDMI input connectors assigned to the input sources.

1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 :

Assign an HDMI input connector to the selected input source.
Do not assign an HDMI input connector to the selected input source.

0 When "HDMI Control" or "ARC" is set to "On" in the menu, "HDMI" cannot be assigned to "TV Audio". ("HDMI Control" (v p. 202), "ARC" (v p. 202))
0 The eARC function does not operate when "HDMI" is set as the "TV Audio" input source.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o DIGITAL

Set this to change the digital audio input connectors assigned to the input sources.

COAX1 (Coaxial) / COAX2 / OPT1 (Optical) / OPT2:
:

Assign a digital audio input connector to the selected input source.
Do not assign a digital audio input connector to the selected input source.

o ANALOG

Set this to change the analog audio input connectors assigned to the input sources.

1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6: :

Assign a analog audio input connector to the selected input source.
Do not assign a analog audio input connector to the selected input source.

o VIDEO

Set this to change the component video input connectors and composite video input connectors assigned to the input sources.

COMP (Component video) / VIDEO1 / VIDEO2:
:

Assign the video input connector to the selected input source.
Do not assign a video input connector to the selected input source.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

211

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o INPUT MODE

Set the audio input modes for each input source. It is normally recommended to set the audio input mode to "AUTO".

AUTO (Default):

Automatically detect input signal and perform playback.

HDMI:

Play only signals from HDMI input.

DIGITAL:

Play only signals from digital audio input.

ANALOG:

Play only signals from analog audio input.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Set Defaults
The "Input Assign" settings are returned to the default settings.

0 When digital signals are properly input, the ~ indicator lights on the display. If the ~ indicator does not light, check "Input Assign" and the connections. (v p. 210)
0 If "ARC" is set to "On" and a TV compatible with the ARC is connected via the HDMI OUT TV 1 connectors, the input mode whose input source is "TV Audio" is fixed to ARC.
0 When an eARC function-compatible television is connected to the HDMI OUT TV 1 connector, the input mode whose input source is "TV Audio" is fixed to eARC.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

212

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Source Rename

0 Changes the display name of the input source. Once changed, the name is displayed on the display and menu screens of this unit.
0 If the device name can be acquired from a connected HDMI device, the display name is changed automatically. Use this function to change names as needed when the device you are using differs from the input source on this unit.

CBL/SAT / Media Player /

Blu-ray / Game1 / Game2 / AUX1 / AUX2 / TV Audio /

Change the display name for input source.

CD / Phono:

Set Defaults:

The "Source Rename" settings are returned to the default settings.

Hide Sources

Remove from the display input sources that are not used.

Show (Default):

Use this source.

Hide:

Do not use this source.

0 Up to 16 characters can be input.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

213

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Source Level
This function corrects the playback level of the selected input source's audio input. Make this setting if there are differences in the input volume levels between the different sources.
o Source Level n When the input source is set to "HEOS Music" or
"Tuner"
-12 dB +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)
o Analog Inputs / Digital Inputs n When the input source is set other than to "HEOS
Music" or "Tuner"
-12dB +12dB (Default : 0dB)

0 The analog input level can be adjusted independently for input sources for which "ANALOG" is assigned at "Input Assign". (v p. 210)
0 The digital input level can be adjusted independently for input sources for which "HDMI" or "DIGITAL" is assigned at "Input Assign". (v p. 210)
0 "Source Level" settings are stored for each input source.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

214

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Speakers
The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and listening room are measured and the optimum settings are made automatically. This is called "Audyssey® Setup". You do not have to perform Audyssey® Setup when you have already performed "Speaker Calibration" in "Setup Assistant". To set up the speakers manually, use "Manual Setup" on the menu. (v p. 226)

Audyssey® Setup
To perform measurement, place the Sound calibration microphone in multiple locations all around the listening area. For best results, we recommend you measure in six or more positions, as shown in the illustration (up to eight positions). When measuring the second and subsequent positions, install the Sound calibration microphone within 2 ft (60 cm) of the first measurement position (main listening position).

FL SW C

( :Measuring positions)

FL Front speaker (L) FR Front speaker (R) C Center speaker SW Subwoofer SL Surround speaker (L) SR Surround speaker (R)

0 If you perform Audyssey® Setup, Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic
EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and Audyssey LFCTM functions are enabled. (v p. 195)

Listening position

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

215

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o About the main listening position
The main listening position is the position where listeners would normally sit or where one would normally sit alone within the listening environment. Before starting Audyssey® Setup, place the Sound calibration microphone in the main listening position. Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 uses the measurements from this position to calculate speaker distance, level, polarity, and the optimum crossover value for the subwoofer.
o About Audyssey Sub EQ HTTM
The Audyssey Sub EQ HTTM performs corrections based on the volume level and the distances of multiple subwoofers, and processes the Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 signal to reproduce a powerful low frequency sound. To run Audyssey Sub EQ HTTM you must set "Measure (2 spkrs)", "Measure (3 spkrs)" or "Measure (4 spkrs)" and set "Subwoofer Mode" to "Standard" in "Speaker Layout". (v p. 236).

Settings

Tips

Appendix

NOTE
0 Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise can disrupt the room measurements. Close windows and turn off the power on electronic devices (radios, air conditioners, fluorescent lights, etc.). The measurements could be affected by the sounds emitted by such devices.
0 During the measurement process, place cell phones outside the listening room. Cell phone signals could disrupt the measurements.
0 Do not stand between the speakers and Sound calibration microphone or allow obstacles in the path while the measurements are being made. Also, install the Sound calibration microphone at least 20 inches (50 cm) away from the wall. Failure to do so will result in inaccurate readings.
0 During the measurement process, audible test tones will come from the speakers and subwoofer(s), but this is part of normal operation. If there is background noise in the room, these test signals will increase in volume.
0 Operating VOLUME d f on the remote control unit or MASTER VOLUME on the main unit during the measurements will cancel the measurements.
0 Measurement cannot be performed when headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones before performing Audyssey® Setup.

0 Audyssey Sub EQ HT will not work when "Subwoofer Mode" is set to "Directional".

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

216

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Procedure for speaker settings (Audyssey® Setup)
Preparation

Measurement

Calculation & Store

Check

Finish

Settings

Tips

Appendix

1 Attach the Sound calibration microphone to the supplied microphone stand or own tripod and install it at the main listening position. When installing the Sound calibration microphone, point the tip of the microphone toward the ceiling and adjust the height to match the height of the ears of a listener in a seated position.
2 If using a subwoofer capable of the following adjustments, set up the subwoofer as shown below. n When using a subwoofer with a direct mode
Set the direct mode to "On" and disable the volume adjustment and crossover frequency setting.
n When using a subwoofer without a direct mode
Make the following settings: 0 Volume : 10 o'clock position 0 Crossover frequency : Maximum/Highest Frequency 0 Low pass filter : Off 0 Standby mode : Off

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

217

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

3 Connect the Sound calibration microphone to the SETUP MIC jack of this unit.

When the Sound calibration microphone is connected, the following screen is displayed.

Audyssey Setup
Your AVR can automatically measure the acoustics of your room then optimize your speakers using the included microphone and microphone stand. Set the following items if necessary.
Speaker Layout Channel Select Dolby Speaker Setup
Start

Speaker Preset 1

Settings

Tips

Appendix

4 Select "Start", then press ENTER. Audyssey® Setup can also make the following settings. 0 Speaker Layout Set the Speaker Layout to suit your speaker environment. 0 Channel Select If "Amp Assign" is set to "9.1ch + Front B", select the Front speakers to be measured. 0 Dolby Speaker Setup Set the distance between the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker and the ceiling. This can be set when using the Front Dolby Atmos Enabled, Surround Dolby Atmos Enabled or Back Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker.
5 Follow the instructions on the screen display and press "Next" to proceed further.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

218

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

6 When the following screen is displayed, select "Begin Test" and then press ENTER. Start the measurement of the first position.

Audyssey Setup

Select "Begin Test" to start the calibration.

NOTE: You will hear a series of loud chirps starting and

stopping during the tests.

Do not stand or place any objects between the speakers

and microphone while the measurements are being

made.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

7 When the detected speaker is displayed, select "Next" and then press ENTER.

Audyssey Setup
Speaker Detection
Front Center Subwoofer Surround Surround Back

Yes Yes 1 spkr Yes No

Back

Begin Test

0 Measurement requires several minutes.

Repeat Last Test

NOTE
0 If "ERROR" or "CAUTION" is displayed on TV screen: 0 Go to "Error messages" (v p. 223). Check any related items, and perform the necessary procedures. 0 If the volume level for the subwoofer is not appropriate, an error message is displayed. See "Subwoofer level error message and how to adjust" (v p. 224).

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

219

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

8 Move the Sound calibration microphone to position 2, select "Continue", then press ENTER. The measurement of the second position starts. Measurements can be made in up to eight positions.

Audyssey Setup
Place the microphone at the ear level of the listener seated at the 2nd listening position, which should be no more than 2 ft (60 cm) away from the 1st listening position, then select "Continue ...
2 · · · · · · · · · · Ear Height

Back

Continue

n Stopping Audyssey® Setup
A Press BACK to display the popup screen. B Press cursor Left to select "Yes", then press ENTER.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

9 Repeat step 8, measuring positions 3 to 8.

0 To skip measuring the fourth and subsequent listening position, press cursor Left to select "Complete" and press ENTER to proceed to step 11.
10 Select "Continue", then press ENTER.

Audyssey Setup

Measurements complete. Select "Continue" to analyze the data...

Repeat Last Test

Continue

Start the analysis and storage of the measurement results.
0 Analysis takes several minutes to complete. The more speakers and measurement positions that there are, the more time it takes to perform the analysis.

NOTE
0 When the measurement results are being saved, make sure the power is not turned off.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

220

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

11 Perform the settings for Audyssey Dynamic EQ® and Audyssey Dynamic Volume®. The following screen is displayed during the analysis. Configure the settings as preferred.
Audyssey Setup

12 When the analysis and storage ends, unplug the Sound calibration microphone from the SETUP MIC jack on the main unit and then press "Next".
Audyssey Setup

Audyssey Dynamic EQ maintains bass, clarity and

Yes

surround sound at low volumes letting you enjoy late-night

movies and television. Turn on Dynamic EQ?

Back

Now Analyzing and correcting your room data. Please disconnect the microphone from your AVR.

Applying room corrections.

100% Next

0 Dynamic EQ corrects the frequency response in consideration of the audio characteristics of the room and human hearing ability so that sound can be heard even at low volume. This is recommended when using the unit with the volume turned down, e.g. when enjoying a movie or TV program in the middle of the night.
0 Dynamic Volume adjusts the output volume to the optimal level while constantly monitoring the level of the audio input to the unit. Optimal volume control is performed automatically without any loss in the dynamism and clarity of the sound when, for example, the volume suddenly increases for commercials shown during television programs.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

221

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 When performing Audyssey® Setup for the first time, the measurement data is automatically saved to "Speaker Preset 1" of "Speaker Preset".
0 If Audyssey® Setup has already been performed, the following "Speaker Preset" selection screen is displayed.
Audyssey Setup

Select which Preset to use. Preset 1 is already used, selecting Preset 1 now will overwrite the previously stored setting.

Speaker Preset 1 Speaker Preset 2

13 Select "Details" and press ENTER to verify the measurement results. 0 Subwoofers may measure a greater reported distance than the actual distance due to added electrical delay common in subwoofers.
NOTE 0 Do not enable new speakers in speaker configuration menu after Audyssey®
Setup. If it is changed, run Audyssey® Setup again in order to configure the optimum equalizer settings.

Back
0 See "Speaker Preset" for detailed information on the Speaker Preset function. (v p. 244)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

222

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Error messages

An error message is displayed if Audyssey® Setup could not be completed due to speaker placement, the measurement environment, etc. If an error message is displayed, check the relevant items and perform the necessary measures. Be sure to turn off the power before checking speaker connections.

Examples

Error details

Measures

No speakers found.

0 Sound calibration microphone is not detected.

0 Connect the included Sound calibration microphone to the SETUP MIC jack of this unit.

0 Not all speakers could be detected.

0 Check the speaker connections.

Ambient noise is too high or level is too 0 There is too much noise in the room. low

0 Either turn off any device generating noise or move it away. 0 Perform again when the surroundings are quieter.

0 Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low.

0 Check the speaker installation and the direction in which the speakers are facing.

0 Adjust the subwoofer's volume.

Front R : None

0 The displayed speaker could not be detected.

0 Check the connections of the displayed speaker.

Front R : Phase

0 The displayed speaker is connected with the polarity reversed.

0 Check the polarity of the displayed speaker.
0 For some speakers, this error message may be displayed even if the speaker is properly connected. If you are sure the connection is correct, press cursor Right to select "Ignore", then press ENTER.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

223

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Subwoofer level error message and how to adjust
The optimal level of each subwoofer channel for Audyssey® Setup measurement is 75 dB. During subwoofer level measurement, an error message is displayed when one level of subwoofers is outside the 72 78 dB range. When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (active type), adjust the subwoofer volume so that the subwoofer level is within the 72 to 78 dB range.
G Error message H

Audyssey Setup

Settings

Tips

Appendix

1 Select "SW Level Matching" and then press ENTER. 2 Adjust the volume control on your subwoofer so that
the measured level is within the 72 to 78 dB range.
3 When the measured level is within the 72 to 78 dB range, select "Next" and then press ENTER. 0 If you use two subwoofers, the second subwoofer's adjustment will be started. Repeat the operation from step 2, 3.

Your Subwoofer 1's level is too high. If your subwoofer has a volume control on it, select "SW Level Matching" to interactively adjust the level of your subwoofer. If your subwoofer does not have a volume
control, or if you do not want to use a subwoofer, select "Skip".

Back

Skip

SW Level Matching

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

224

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Retrieving Audyssey® Setup settings
If you set "Restore..." to "Restore", you can return to Audyssey® Setup measurement result (value calculated at the start by MultEQ® XT32) even when you have changed each setting manually.

Speaker Preset 1

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

225

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Manual Setup
Perform when setting the speakers manually or when changing settings made in Audyssey® Setup. 0 If you enable new speakers in the speaker configuration menu after
performing Audyssey® Setup, you will no longer be able to select Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ® or Audyssey Dynamic Volume®. (v p. 195) 0 Changing the following settings: Distances / Levels / Crossovers settings will not disable Audyssey® or require running Audyssey® Setup again. 0 "Manual Setup" can be used without changing the settings. Please set if necessary.

Speaker Layout
Select a suitable speaker layout for your speaker system.

o Amp Assign

Select the power amplifier usage method to match your speaker system.
You need to configure the detailed settings for the speaker configuration in accordance with the selected mode. Select Amp Assign configure the corresponding detailed settings.

13.1ch:
11.1ch: 9.1ch + ZONE2 (Default):

0 Setting to use the 11-channel power amplifier in this unit and an external power amplifier connected to PRE OUT to play back up to 13.1-channels.
0 You can connect speakers for up to 11.1channels for MAIN ZONE.
0 Settings to assign all power amplifier within this unit to MAIN ZONE to play back up to 11.1-channels.
0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for ZONE2 to 2-channels.
0 You can connect speakers for up to 9.1channels for MAIN ZONE.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

226

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

9.1ch + ZONE3: 7.1ch + ZONE2/3: 9.1ch + ZONE2/3-MONO: 9.1ch (Bi-Amp):

0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for ZONE3 to 2-channels
0 You can connect speakers for up to 9.1channels for MAIN ZONE.
0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers within this unit for ZONE2 and ZONE3 each to two different channel.
0 You can connect speakers for up to 7.1channels for MAIN ZONE.
0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for ZONE2 and ZONE3 each to a different channel.
0 You can connect speakers for up to 9.1channels for MAIN ZONE.
0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for front speaker bi-amp connection to 2-channels.
0 You can connect speakers for up to 9.1channels for MAIN ZONE.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

7.1ch (Bi-Amp) + ZONE2:

0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for front speaker bi-amp connection to 2-channels.
0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for ZONE2 to 2-channels.

5.1ch Full Bi-Amp:

0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for front, center and surround speakers to 10 channels.
0 You can connect speakers for up to 5.1 channels for MAIN ZONE.

9.1ch + Front B:

0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers within this unit for connecting the second set of front speakers.
0 You can switch between the desired combination of front speakers A and front speakers B.
Switch the front speaker using the "Front Speaker" setting. (v p. 248)

Preamplifier:

0 All of the speakers are connected using an external power amplifier and this unit is used as a preamplifier.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

227

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Front/Center/Surround/Surround Back/Front Wide
Set the correct audio output terminals for your speaker system.
n Configuration
Select whether or not each speaker exists. For Surround Back speakers, select the number of speakers to be used.

[Front/Center/Surround/Front Wide]

Yes (Default):

The selected speakers will be used.

No:

The selected speakers will not be used.

[Surround Back] 2 spkrs (Default):
1 spkr:
No:

Two Surround Back speakers will be used.
Only one Surround Back speaker will be used. When you select this setting, connect to the SURROUND BACK L terminal.
Surround Back speakers will not be used.

n Connection

Select the output terminals for audio from the speakers.

Spkr + Pre-out (Default):

Speaker and pre-out outputs are active.

Pre-out Only:

Pre-out outputs are active. Speaker outputs are disconnected for enhanced audio quality using only the pre-out terminals.

0 When "Amp Assign" is set to "Preamplifier", the "Connection" setting of all speakers will be fixed as "Pre-out Only".
0 When "Amp Assign" is set to "13.1ch" and 13 channels of speakers are used, at least one of the channels assigned to the Front, Height 3 or Front Wide must be set to "Pre-out Only".

0 "Front" is fixed as "Yes" as it is required for playback.
0 When "Surround" is set to "No", "Surround Back" and "Front Wide" settings are automatically set to "No".

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

228

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Height Speakers

Select the number of the height speakers, ceiling speakers and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers used in MAIN ZONE.

None:

Uses no height, ceiling and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers.

2 spkrs:

Uses a set of (two) height speakers, ceiling speakers or Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers.

4 spkrs:

Uses two set of (four) height speakers, ceiling speakers or Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers.

5 spkrs:

Uses five height speakers, ceiling speakers or Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers.

6 spkrs:

Uses six height speakers, ceiling speakers or Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers.

0 Select the "5 spkrs" setting or higher when using Top Surround or Center Height speakers.
0 "5 spkrs" and "6 spkrs" can be selected when "Front Wide" is not used.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

229

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Layout n Configuration

Set the speaker layout when installing 1 set (2-channels) of Height, Ceiling or Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers.
The layouts that can be selected differ depending on the combinations of "Amp Assign" and floor speaker settings in the menu. ("Amp Assign" (v p. 226), "Front/Center/Surround/Surround Back/Front Wide" (v p. 228))

[2-channel height speakers]

Height Speakers

Settings

Layout

AUDIO OUT connectors

HEIGHT 1

HEIGHT 2

None

Front Height

Top Front

Top Middle

Top Rear

2 spkrs

Rear Height

Front Dolby

Surround Dolbyz1

Surround Dolby

Back Dolbyz2

Back Dolby

z1 This can be selected when using Surround speakers. Set "Surround" in the menu to "Yes". (v p. 228) z2 This can be selected when using two Surround Back speakers. Set "Surround Back" in the menu to "2 spkrs". (v p. 228)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

230

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

n Connection

Select the output terminals for Height speakers.

Spkr + Pre-out (Default):

Speaker and pre-out outputs are active.

Pre-out Only:

Pre-out outputs are active. Speaker outputs are disconnected for enhanced audio quality using only the pre-out terminals.

0 When "Amp Assign" is set to "Preamplifier", the "Connection" setting of all speakers will be fixed as "Pre-out Only".

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

231

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Front Layout / Middle Layout / Rear Layout / TS/CH
Select the layout setting and audio output terminals for your Height speakers.

n Configuration
Set the speaker layout when installing 2 sets (4-channels) or more of Height, Ceiling or Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers. The layouts that can be selected differ depending on the combinations of "Amp Assign" and floor speaker settings in the menu. ("Amp Assign" (v p. 226), "Front/Center/Surround/Surround Back/Front Wide" (v p. 228))

[4-channel height speakers]

Height Speakers

NOTE

Settings Front Layout

4 spkrs

Front Height Front Height Front Height Front Height Front Height Front Height
Top Front Top Front Top Front Top Front Top Middle Front Dolby Front Dolby Front Dolby Front Dolby

Rear Layout
Top Middle Top Rear Surround Height Rear Height Surround Dolby Back Dolbyz1 Top Rear Rear Height Surround Dolby Back Dolbyz1 Rear Height Top Rear Rear Height Surround Dolby Back Dolbyz1

HEIGHT 1
Front Height Front Height Front Height Front Height Front Height Front Height
Top Front Top Front Top Front Top Front Top Middle Front Dolby Front Dolby Front Dolby Front Dolby

AUDIO OUT connectors

HEIGHT 2

HEIGHT 3/FRONT WIDE

Top Middle

Top Rear

Surround Height

Rear Height

Surround Dolby

Back Dolby

Top Rear

Rear Height

Surround Dolby

Back Dolby

Rear Height

Top Rear

Rear Height

Surround Dolby

Back Dolby

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

232

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

[5-channel height speakes]

Height Speakers

NOTE

5 spkrs

Settings
Front Layout
Front Height Front Height Front Height Front Height

Rear Layout
Surround Height Surround Height
Rear Height Rear Height

TS/CH
Top Surround Center Height Top Surround Center Height

AUDIO OUT connectors

HEIGHT 1

HEIGHT 2

HEIGHT 3/ FRONT WIDE

Front Height Surround Height L: Top Surround

Front Height Surround Height R: Center Height

Front Height

Rear Height L: Top Surround

Front Height

Rear Height R: Center Height

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

233

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

[6-channel height speakes]

Height Speakers

NOTE

Settings

Front Layout

Middle Layout

Rear Layout

TS/CH

AUDIO OUT connectors

HEIGHT 1

HEIGHT 2

HEIGHT 3/ FRONT WIDE

Front Height Top Middle Rear Height

Front Height Rear Height Top Middle

Front Height

Surround Height

Rear Height

Front Height Rear Height

Surround Height

Front Height

Surround Height

TS/CH

Front Height

Surround Height

L: Top Surround R: Center
Height

Front Height Surround Dolby Rear Height

Front Height Rear Height Surround Dolby

6 spkrs

Front Height Surround Dolby Back Dolbyz1

Front Height

Rear Height

TS/CH

Front Height Front Height

Back Dolby Rear Height

Surround Dolby
L: Top Surround R: Center
Height

Top Front

Top Middle

Top Rear

Top Front

Top Rear

Top Middle

Top Front Surround Dolby Top Rear

Front Dolby Top Middle Back Dolbyz1

Top Front Front Dolby

Top Rear Surround Dolby Back Dolby Top Middle

Front Dolby Surround Dolby Rear Height

Front Dolby Surround Dolby Back Dolbyz1

Front Dolby Front Dolby

Rear Height Surround Dolby Back Dolby Surround Dolby

z1 This can be selected when using two Surround Back speakers. Set "Surround Back" in the menu to "2 spkrs". (v p. 228)
z2 Use 2 sets of Height speakers in the appropriate sound modes for Dolby Atmos, DTS:X or AURO-3D playback. Use the Front Height and Rear Height speakers for Dolby Atmos playback. Use the Front Height, Surround Height and Rear Height speakers for DTS:X playback. Use the Front Height and Surround Height speakers for AURO-3D playback.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

234

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

n Connection

Select the audio output terminal(s) for each Height speaker.

Spkr + Pre-out (Default):

Speaker and pre-out outputs are active.

Pre-out Only:

Pre-out outputs are active. Speaker outputs are disconnected for enhanced audio quality using only the pre-out terminals.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Subwoofers

Set the presence of a subwoofer.

4 spkrs:

Use four subwoofers.

3 spkrs:

Use three subwoofers.

2 spkrs:

Use two subwoofers.

1 spkr (Default):

Use only one subwoofer.

No:

Select when a subwoofer is not connected.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

235

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Subwoofer Mode

When you are using multiple subwoofers, set the audio to be output from the subwoofer.

Standard (Default):

All subwoofers output LFE signals and bass below the crossover frequency of all the speakers.

Directional:

All subwoofers output LFE signals. In addition, each subwoofer outputs bass below the crossover frequency of speakers that are placed near them.

o Subwoofer Layout

When you are using multiple subwoofers, configure the subwoofer layout. The layouts that can be selected differ depending on the configuration of "Subwoofer Mode".

[When "Subwoofers" is set to "2 spkrs"]

Left/Right (Default):
Front/Rear:

Place subwoofers symmetrically on the front side.
Place a subwoofer in the middle of the front side and another in the middle of the rear side.

0 This can be set when "Subwoofers" is set to "4 spkrs", "3 spkrs" or "2 spkrs".

[When "Subwoofers" is set to "3 spkrs"]

FL/FR/Rear:

Place subwoofers symmetrically on the front side and one in the middle of the rear side.

[When "Subwoofers" is set to "4 spkrs"]

FL/FR/RL/RR:

Place the subwoofers in the four corners of the room.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

236

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 This can be set when "Subwoofers" is set to "4 spkrs", "3 spkrs" or "2 spkrs", and "Subwoofer Mode" is set to "Directional". 0 The name of the Subwoofer that is displayed in the GUI of this unit depends on the setting combination of "Subwoofers", "Subwoofer Mode", and "Subwoofer Layout".

Subwoofers Subwoofer Mode

Subwoofer Layout

Subwoofer 1

Subwoofer name

Subwoofer 2

Subwoofer 3

Subwoofer 4

1 spkr

Subwoofer 1

Standard

Subwoofer 1

Subwoofer 2

2 spkrs

Left/Right

Subwoofer Left Subwoofer Right

Directional

Front/Rear

Subwoofer Front Subwoofer Rear

Standard

Subwoofer 1

Subwoofer 2

Subwoofer 3

3 spkrs

Directional

FL/FR/Rear

Subwoofer FL

Subwoofer FR

Subwoofer Rear

4 spkrs

Standard Directional

FL/FR/RL/RR

Subwoofer 1 Subwoofer FL

Subwoofer 2 Subwoofer FR

Subwoofer 3 Subwoofer RL

Subwoofer 4 Subwoofer RR

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

237

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 With the "Directional" setting, your room is divided into four areas as shown below so that each subwoofer plays the bass of the speaker set to other than "Full Range" which is located within the area.

LEFT

RIGHT

Front

FHL

FHR

FDL

FDR

FWL TFL

TFR FWR

TML TS TMR

SDL

SDR

SHL SL TRL

SR SHR TRR

BDL

BDR

SBL

SBR

RHL

RHR

Rear

For example, if "Subwoofers" = 2 spkrs and Subwoofer Layout = Left/Right, Subwoofer Left (Subwoofer 1) plays the bass of the speakers in the Left area which includes FL/SL and Subwoofer Right (Subwoofer 2) plays the bass of the speakers in the Right area which includes FR/SR.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

238

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Bi-Amp

When "Amp Assign" is "9.1ch (Bi-Amp)" and "7.1ch (Bi-Amp) + ZONE2", the speaker terminal used for the bi-amp connection of the front speakers is displayed. Depending on the settings of Main Zone speaker configuration, the terminal is determined automatically.

The HEIGHT 3/FRONT WIDE speaker HEIGHT 3/FRONT WIDE: terminal is used for the bi-amp
connection of the front speakers.

HEIGHT 2:

The HEIGHT 2 speaker terminal is used for the bi-amp connection of the front speakers.

HEIGHT 1:

The HEIGHT 1 speaker terminal is used for the bi-amp connection of the front speakers.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Front B

When "Amp Assign" is "9.1ch + Front B", the speaker terminal used for the second front speakers is displayed. Depending on the settings of Main Zone speaker configuration, the terminal is determined automatically.

The HEIGHT 3/FRONT WIDE speaker HEIGHT 3/FRONT WIDE: terminal is used for the second front
speakers.

HEIGHT 2:

The HEIGHT 2 speaker terminal is used for the second front speakers.

HEIGHT 1:

The HEIGHT 1 speaker terminal is used for the second front speakers.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

239

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o ZONE2

When "Amp Assign" is "9.1ch + ZONE2", "7.1ch + ZONE2/3" and "7.1ch (Bi-Amp) + ZONE2", the speaker terminal used for the ZONE2 speakers is displayed. Depending on the settings of Main Zone speaker configuration, the terminal is determined automatically.

HEIGHT 3/FRONT WIDE:

The HEIGHT 3/FRONT WIDE speaker terminal is used for the ZONE2 speakers.

HEIGHT 2:

The HEIGHT 2 speaker terminal is used for the ZONE2 speakers.

HEIGHT 1:

The HEIGHT 1 speaker terminal is used for the ZONE2 speakers.

o ZONE3

When "Amp Assign" is "9.1ch + ZONE3" and "7.1ch + ZONE2/3", the speaker terminal used for the ZONE3 speakers is displayed. Depending on the settings of Main Zone speaker configuration, the terminal is determined automatically.

HEIGHT 3/FRONT WIDE:

The HEIGHT 3/FRONT WIDE speaker terminal is used for the ZONE3 speakers.

HEIGHT 2:

The HEIGHT 2 speaker terminal is used for the ZONE3 speakers.

HEIGHT 1:

The HEIGHT 1 speaker terminal is used for the ZONE3 speakers.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

240

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o ZONE2/3

When "Amp Assign" is "9.1ch + ZONE2/3-MONO", the speaker terminal used for the ZONE2/3 speakers is displayed. Depending on the settings of Main Zone speaker configuration, the terminal is determined automatically.

The HEIGHT 3/FRONT WIDE speaker HEIGHT 3/FRONT WIDE: terminal is used for the ZONE2/3
speakers.

HEIGHT 2:

The HEIGHT 2 speaker terminal is used for the ZONE2/3 speakers.

HEIGHT 1:

The HEIGHT 1 speaker terminal is used for the ZONE2/3 speakers.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o View Terminal Config.
This shows how to connect the speaker terminals and PRE OUT connectors for your "Speaker Layout" setting on the menu screen.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

241

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Distances
Set distance from listening position to speakers. Measure beforehand the distance from the listening position to each speaker.
When using Dirac Live, the unit is fixed as "Dirac Live Setup" (v p. 252). "Distances" values for each filter are stored independently in Dirac Live Room Correction.
o Unit
Set the unit of distance. Feet (Default) Meters
[When using Dirac Live] msec
o Step
Set the minimum variable width of the distance. 1 ft / 0.1 ft (Default: 1 ft) 0.1 m / 0.01 m
[When using Dirac Live] 1 ms / 0.1 ms

Settings

Tips

o Set the distance
0.0 ft 59.1 ft / 0.00 m 18.00 m
[When using Dirac Live] 0.0 ms 20.0 ms

Appendix

0 The speakers that can be selected differ depending on the "Speaker Layout" settings. (v p. 226)
0 Default settings: Front L / Front R / Front Height L / Front Height R / Center / Front Wide L / Front Wide R / Front Dolby L / Front Dolby R / Subwoofer 1 / Subwoofer 2 / Subwoofer 3 / Subwoofer 4: 11.8 ft (3.60 m) Speakers other than the above: 9.8 ft (3.00 m)
0 Set the difference in the distance between the speakers to less than 19.7 ft (6.00 m).

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

242

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Dolby Speaker Setup
Set the distance between the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker and the ceiling. 3.0 ft - 10.8 ft / 0.90 m - 3.30 m (Default: 5.9 ft / 1.80 m)
0 This can be set when "Front Dolby", "Surround Dolby" or "Back Dolby" is set to use in "Speaker Layout". (v p. 226)
0 Cannot be set when Dirac Live are being used. (v p. 198)
o Set Defaults
The "Distances" settings are returned to the default settings.

Levels
Set the volume of the test tone to be the same at the listening position when it is output from each speaker.
"Levels" values for each filter are stored independently in Dirac Live Room Correction.
o Test Tone Start
A test tone is output from the selected speaker. While listening to the test tone, adjust the volume output from the selected speaker. 12.0 dB +12.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)

0 The set "Levels" are reflected in all sound modes. 0 If you want to adjust the channel levels for each input source, set these in
"Channel Level Adjust" in the options menu. (v p. 134) 0 When headphones are connected to the PHONES connector on this unit, you
cannot set "Levels".
o Set Defaults
The "Levels" settings are returned to the default settings.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

243

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Crossovers

Set in accordance with the lower limit frequency of the base frequencies that can be played back through each speaker. See the speaker manual for information concerning speaker crossover frequency.
o Set the crossover frequency

Full Range:

Select "Full Range" to set the speaker to play full-range audio.

40 Hz / 60 Hz / 80 Hz /

90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 180 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz

Selects the crossover point to send the low frequency sound to the subwoofer.

(Default: 80 Hz)

0 The default crossover frequency is "80 Hz", which will work best with the widest variety of speakers. We recommend setting to a higher frequency that the crossover frequency when small speakers are used. For example, set to "250 Hz" when the frequency range of the speakers is 250 Hz 20 kHz.
0 Sound below the crossover frequency is cut off from the output of the speakers. This cut off bass frequency is output from the subwoofer or front speakers.
0 The "Front" is automatically set to "Full Range" when "Subwoofers" is set to "No" in the "Speaker Layout".
0 Each speaker can be set to "Full Range" only when the Front is set to "Full Range".
0 The audio settings in "IMAX Audio Settings" are applied during IMAX playback. (v p. 188)

Speaker Preset

Two speaker settings can be saved to suit the environments where you use your speakers.
For example, in some cases the characteristics of a room change depending on whether a screen is used. By saving two different presets, you can easily switch between the equalizer and speaker settings for each situation that were measured with an Audyssey® Setup.
Presets also make it easy to switch between the sound effects of an Audyssey Setup and those of Dirac Live.
If you want to use a preset, select the preset you want to use and then configure settings such as Audyssey® Setup, Dirac Live Room Correctionz and speaker settings to save those settings to the selected preset.
z When exporting measurement results from Dirac Live Software to this unit for the first time, the settings are automatically saved in "Speaker Preset 2".

Speaker Preset 1 (Default):
Speaker Preset 2:

Saves the settings to Preset 1. Saves the settings to Preset 2.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

244

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

0 The following settings are saved to presets.
0 "Speaker Layout" settings 0 "Distances" settings 0 "Levels" settings 0 "Crossovers" settings 0 "Subwoofer Output" settings 0 "Low Pass Filter" settings 0 "Distribution" settings 0 "2ch Playback" settings 0 "Front Speaker" settings 0 "MultEQ® XT32" data 0 "Dirac Live" data 0 "Graphic EQ" data 0 This setting also be configured using "Speaker Preset" in the option menu. (v p. 140)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Advanced
The following advanced speaker settings are available.
o Low Frequency Effects
0 "Subwoofer Output" (v p. 246) 0 "Low Pass Filter" (v p. 247) 0 "Distribution" (v p. 247)
o Front Speaker (v p. 248)
o 2ch Playback (v p. 248)
o Tactile Transducer (v p. 251)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

245

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Subwoofer Output

Selects which low frequency signals are sent to the subwoofer outputs.
o Subwoofer Output

LFE (Default):
LFE + Main:

The subwoofer outputs receive the LFE track, plus any redirected bass from speakers with crossovers set. Use this setting as the default for home theater bass management in a typical room.
The subwoofer outputs receive the LFE track, plus redirected bass, and a copy of the low frequency signals from all fullrange speakers.

o Bass Extraction LPF
Selects the low-pass filter point for the full-range speaker to copy the low frequency signal to subwoofer.
40 Hz / 60 Hz / 80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 180 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default: 80 Hz)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 "Subwoofer Output" can be set when "Speaker Layout" - "Subwoofers" in the menu is set to other than "No". (v p. 235)
0 Play music or a movie source and select the mode offering the strongest bass.
0 If "Crossovers" - "Front" and "Center" are set to "Full Range", and "Subwoofer Output" is set to "LFE", no sound may be output from the subwoofers, depending on the input signal or selected sound mode. (v p. 244) Select "LFE + Main" if you want the bass signals to always be produced from the subwoofer.
0 "Bass Extraction LPF" can only be set for channels with "Crossovers" set to "Full Range".
0 The audio settings in "IMAX Audio Settings" are applied during IMAX playback. (v p. 188)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

246

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Low Pass Filter
Selects the crossover point for the LFE channel. Set this when you want to change the playback LFE signal of the subwoofer.
o Low Pass Filter
80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 180 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default: 120 Hz)
0 The audio settings in "IMAX Audio Settings" are applied during IMAX playback. (v p. 188)

Distribution

Adjusts the amount of LFE signal sent to the full-range floor speakers.
o Front/Center/Surround/Surround Back/Front Wide

Off (Default):
20 dB 0 dB

Floor Speakers do not play LFE signals.
Adjusts the amount of LFE signal sent to the large full-range speakers.

0 This can only be set if the "Front", "Center", "Surround", "Surround Back" or "Front Wide" speaker is set to "Full Range" in "Crossovers".

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

247

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Front Speaker

Set the front speaker A/B to use for every sound mode.

A (Default):

Front speaker A is used.

B :

Front speaker B is used.

A+B :

Both front speakers A and B are used.

0 This can be set when "Amp Assign" is set to "9.1ch + Front B". (v p. 227)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

2ch Playback

Select the method for setting the speakers used in the 2-channel direct and stereo playback modes.

o Setting

Select the method for setting the speakers used in the 2-channel direct and stereo playback modes.

Auto (Default):
Manual:

The settings in "Speakers" are applied. (v p. 215)
Set the speakers for 2-channel playback. Make the following settings.

o Crossover

Set the maximum frequency of the bass signal output from each channel to the subwoofer.

Full Range:

Select "Full Range" to set the speaker to play full-range audio.

40 Hz / 60 Hz / 80 Hz /

90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 180 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz

Selects the crossover point to send the low frequency sound to the subwoofer.

(Default: 80 Hz)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

248

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

0 When "Speaker Layout" - "Subwoofers" in the menu is set to "No", "Full Range" is automatically set. (v p. 235)
0 When "2ch Playback" - "Subwoofer" is set to "No", "Full Range" is automatically set. (v p. 249)

o Subwoofer

Set the presence of a subwoofer.

Yes (Default):
No:

Use a subwoofer.
Select when a subwoofer is not connected.

0 When "Speaker Layout" - "Subwoofers" in the menu is set to "No", No is automatically set. (v p. 235)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Subwoofer Output

Selects which low frequency signals are sent to the subwoofer outputs.

LFE (Default):
LFE + Main:

When "2ch Playback" - "Crossover" is set to "Full Range", only LFE signals are output from the subwoofer. Also, when "2ch Playback" - "Crossover" is set to other than "Full Range", the front channel low range signals are added to the LFE signals and output from the subwoofer.
The front channel low range signal is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer.

0 This can be set when "2ch Playback" - "Subwoofer" is set to "Yes".

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

249

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Distance FL / Distance FR
Set distance from main listening position to speaker. The unit is "msec" when using "Dirac Live".
0.0 ft 59.1 ft (Default: 11.8 ft) / 0.00 m 18.00 m (Default: 3.60 m)

0 This can be set when "2ch Playback" - "Crossover" is set to "Full Range", and "2ch Playback" - "Subwoofer" is set to "Yes".
o LFE Distribution

Adjusts the amount of LFE signal sent to the full-range front speakers.

Off (Default):
20 dB 0 dB

Front Speakers do not play LFE signals.
Adjusts the amount of LFE signal sent to the front speakers

0 This can be set when "2ch Playback" - "Crossover" is set to "Full Range", and "2ch Playback" - "Subwoofer" is set to "Yes".

0 Set the difference in the distance between the speakers to less than 19.7 ft (6.00 m).
[When using Dirac Live] 0.0 ms 20.0 ms
o Level FL / Level FR
Adjust the level of each channel. -12.0 dB +12.0 dB (Default: 0.0 dB)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

250

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Tactile Transducer

Set the level and low pass filter cutoff frequency when using tactile transducers.

o Tactile Transducer

Sets the tactile transducer option.

Enabled:

Enables tactile transducers.

Disabled (Default):

Disables the tactile transducers.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Low Pass Filter
Selects the low pass filter cutoff frequency for the tactile transducer output.
40 Hz / 60 Hz / 80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 180 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default: 80 Hz)
0 The "Low Pass Filter" are reflected in all input sources.

0 For Tactile Transducer connections, use the Subwoofer 4 PRE OUT connector.
0 This can not be set when "Speaker Layout" - "Subwoofers" is set to "4 spkrs".
o Level
Adjusts the volume of the tactile transducer output. 12.0 dB +12.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)

0 The "Level" are reflected in all input sources.
0 If you want to adjust the transducer output levels for each input source, set these in "Tactile Transducer" in the options menu. (v p. 137)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

251

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Dirac Live Setup
Dirac Live is a powerful solution that helps you get the best from your speakers. Dirac Live and its various features use research-driven acoustic processing algorithms to analyze your room and reduce its impact on sound quality, resulting in speaker performance that would be physically impossible otherwise.
You will need to create a Dirac Live account and purchase a license before running Dirac Live. You can create an account and purchase a license on the website below.
www.dirac.com/denon/

See the Dirac Live Room Correction manual for details on Dirac Live. https://manuals.denon.com/DiracLive/ALL/EN/

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

252

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Network
To use this unit by connecting it to a home network (LAN), you must configure network settings. If you set up your home network (LAN) via DHCP, set "DHCP" to "On". (Use the default setting.) This allows this unit to use your home network (LAN). When assigning an IP address to each device manually, you need to assign an IP address to this unit using the "IP Address" settings, and enter information about your home network (LAN) such as the gateway address and subnet mask, etc.

Information
Display network information.
Friendly Name / Connection / SSID / DHCP / IP Address / MAC Address (Ethernet) / MAC Address (Wi-Fi) / Wi-Fi signal strength

Connection
Choose whether to connect the home network to a wireless LAN or a wired LAN. When connecting to the network using wired LAN, select "Wired (Ethernet)" after connecting a LAN cable. When connecting to the network using wireless LAN, select "Wireless (WiFi)" and configure the "Wi-Fi Setup". (v p. 254)

o Connect Using

Select the method for connecting to the home network (LAN).

Wired (Ethernet): Wireless (Wi-Fi) (Default):

Use a LAN cable to connect to a network. Use the wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) function to connect to a network.

0 "Wired (Ethernet)" is set when "Wi-Fi" is set to "Disabled". (v p. 260)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

253

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Wi-Fi Setup
Connect to a wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) router. The router can be connected in the following ways. Select the connection method to suit your home environment.
o Scan Networks
Select the network you wish to connect to from the list of possible networks shown on the TV screen. 1. Select the network you wish to connect to from the list of wireless
networks. Select "Rescan" if the network cannot be found. 2. Enter your password and select "OK".

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Use iOS Device
Use your iOS device (iPhone/iPod/iPad) to connect to the network. By connecting your iOS device to this unit using Wi-Fi, the unit can be automatically connected to the same network as your device.
1. Select "Use iOS Device" on the TV screen. 2. Check that your iOS device is connected to the wireless LAN (Wi-
Fi) router and select "Denon AVR-X6800H" from "SET UP NEW AIRPLAY SPEAKER..." at the bottom of the Wi-Fi configuration screen of your iOS device. 3. Tap "Next" on the screen of the iOS device.

0 The iOS device firmware version needs to support iOS 10.0.2 or later.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

254

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o WPS Router
Use a WPS-compatible router to connect using the push button method. 1. Select "Push Button" on the TV screen. 2. Switch to the WPS mode by pressing the WPS button of the router
you wish to connect to. 0 The time for pressing the button varies depending on the router. 3. Select "Connect" on the TV screen within 2 minutes.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Manual

Enter the name (SSID) and password of the network you wish to connect to.
1. Set the following items.

SSID: Security: Password:

Input the name of the wireless network (SSID).
Select the encryption method according to the encryption setting of the access point you are using.
Input the password.

2. Select "Connect" at the end of the setting.

0 The Default key of this unit is fixed at "1". Set Default key of the router to "1" to use.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

255

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings
Configure the IP address. 0 If you are using a broadband router (DHCP function), the information
required for network connection such as the IP address will be automatically configured since the DHCP function is set to "On" in the default settings of this unit. 0 Set up the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway and DNS server information only when assigning a fixed IP address or when connecting to a network without DHCP function.

Network/Settings
DHCP IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway DNS

Off 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000

Cancel

Configures the network settings automatically or manually.

Save

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o DHCP

Selects how to connect to the network.

On (Default):
Off:

Configure the network settings automatically from your router.
Configure the network settings manually.

o IP Address

Set the IP address within the ranges shown below. 0 The Network Audio function cannot be used if other IP addresses
are set. CLASS A: 10.0.0.1 - 10.255.255.254 CLASS B: 172.16.0.1 - 172.31.255.254 CLASS C: 192.168.0.1 - 192.168.255.254

o Subnet Mask

When connecting an xDSL modem or connector adapter directly to this unit, input the subnet mask indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider. Normally input "255.255.255.0".

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

256

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Default Gateway
When connected to a gateway (router), input its IP address.
o DNS
Enter the DNS address indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Network Control

Enables network communication in standby power mode.

Off In Standby:

Suspend network function during standby.

Always On (Default):

Network is on during standby. Main unit operable with a network compatible controller.

0 If you cannot connect to the Internet, recheck the connections and settings. (v p. 84)
0 If you do not understand about Internet connection, contact your ISP (Internet Service Provider) or the store from which you purchased your computer.

0 When using the web control function, Denon AVR Remote App or HEOS App, use with the "Network Control" setting set to "Always On".
NOTE 0 When "Network Control" is set to "Always On", the unit consumes more standby
power.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

257

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Friendly Name
The Friendly Name is the name of this unit displayed on the network. You can change the Friendly Name according to your preferences.
o Friendly Name
Selects Friendly Name from the list. When you select "Other", you can change the Friendly Name according to your preferences. Home Theater /Living Room / Family Room / Guest Room / Kitchen / Dining Room / Master Bedroom / Bedroom / Den / Office / Other
0 Up to 30 characters can be input. 0 The default Friendly Name on first use is "Denon AVR-X6800H".
o Set Defaults
Restores Friendly Name, which you had changed, to the default setting.

Diagnostics

Used to check the network connection.

o Physical Connection

Checks the physical LAN port connection.

OK Error:

The LAN cable is not connected. Check the connection.

0 When connected using a wireless LAN, "Connection be displayed.
o Router Access

Wireless (Wi-Fi)" will

Checks the connection from this unit to the router.

OK Error:

Failed to communicate with the router. Check the router settings.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

258

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Internet Access

Checks whether this unit has access to the Internet (WAN).

OK Error:

Failed to connect to the Internet. Check the Internet connection environment or router settings.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

AirPlay
Settings for Apple AirPlay.
o AirPlay Name
Displays the name which identifies this unit on Apple devices.

0 If you registered this unit to the Apple Home app, use the app to change the name.
o AirPlay

Enables/disables the Apple AirPlay.

On (Default):
Off:

Enables Apple AirPlay. Disables Apple AirPlay.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

259

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Spotify Connect
Toggles access to Spotify Connect.

On (Default):
Off:

Enables Spotify Connect. Disables Spotify Connect.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Wi-Fi and Bluetooth

Enables/disables the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth radios.

o Wi-Fi

The Wi-Fi function can be stopped to prevent noise that affects the sound quality. Using a wired LAN to connect this unit to the network enables playback with a high sound quality.

Enabled (Default):

Enables the Wi-Fi function.

Disabled:

Disables the Wi-Fi function.

o Bluetooth

Stopping Bluetooth receiver and transmitter functions reduces a source of noise that affects sound quality, enabling higher sound quality playback.

Enabled (Default):
Disabled:

Enables the Bluetooth function. Disables the Bluetooth function.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

260

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

HEOS
HEOS Account is needed in order to use HEOS Favorites. The menu displayed differs depending on the status of the HEOS Account.

You have not signed in
A QR code is displayed on the TV screen. Scan the QR code with your mobile device and download the HEOS App. After creating or signing in to your HEOS Account in the HEOS App, you can save and call up your favorite streaming music services from this unit's screen. (v p. 132) See "Getting the HEOS App" (v p. 118) for details about the HEOS App.
0 This unit's HEOS Account setting information is synced with the HEOS App. Change settings and sign out of your account through the HEOS App.

You have already signed in
o Signed in as
The currently signed in HEOS Account is displayed.
0 This unit automatically syncs when you change your account settings or sign out through the HEOS App. To switch HEOS accounts, play back music from an HEOS App signed in to the account you wish to sync to this unit. The "HEOS Account" switches automatically.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

261

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

General
Make various other settings.

Language
Set the language for display the menu on the TV screen.
English / Français / Español (Default: English)
0 "Language" can also be set up by the following operation. However, the menu screen is not displayed. Watch the display while configuring the settings. 1. Press and hold the main unit's ZONE3 SOURCE and STATUS at the same time for at least 3 seconds. "z4K/8K Format <Enhanced>" appears on the display. 2. Press cursor Down on the main unit once. "zLanguage <ENGLISH>" appears on the display. 3. Use the main unit's cursor Left or cursor Right and set the language. 4. Press the main unit's ENTER to complete the setting.

ECO
Configure the ECO Mode and auto standby mode settings.
o ECO Mode
This mode can reduce the power consumption and heat generation of this unit when power on. This is done by reducing the power supply line to the power amplifier, in turn the maximum power output.

Owner's Manual
Shows URL and QR code to access the online Owner's Manual from your mobile device.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

262

Remote

Index

Contents On:
Auto (Default):
Off:

Connections

Playback

Power savings are always active, regardless of volume or input signal.
Gives you the best balance between power savings and maximum power output:
For low volume levels, the power savings are active. If you increase the volume level, the power savings are switched off automatically, so you can enjoy maximum output power without distortion.
If the volume is set to a high level but no input signal is detected for more than 2 minutes, this unit will enable power savings. When an input signal is detected again or the input source is changed, this unit will automatically turn off power savings again at high volume levels.
No power savings.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 When the unit is switching between the different power saving states in "ECO Mode: Auto", you may notice a click noise from the inside of this unit, this is normal.
0 If content is paused for more than 2 minutes and playback is resumed from the same source at these high volume levels, there may be short delay before maximum power is restored.
0 "ECO Mode" cannot be set when "Amp Assign" is set to "Preamplifier" (v p. 227) or speaker impedance is set to 4 /ohms (v p. 40).

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

263

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Power On Default

Set the mode to ECO when the power is on.

Last (Default): On:
Auto:
Off:

The ECO Mode will be set to the previous setting before the power was switched off.
When power is turned on, the mode will always be switched to the ECO Mode in "On".
When power is turned on, the mode will always be switched to the ECO Mode in "Auto".
When power is turned on, the mode will always be switched to the ECO Mode in "Off".

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o On Screen Display

Display the power consumption of this unit using a meter on the TV screen.

Always On:
Auto (Default): Off:

Always display the meter on the TV screen.
Display the meter when changing the mode or volume.
Do not display the meter.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

264

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Auto Standby

Set so the unit power automatically switches to standby.
n MAIN ZONE

Sets the time for switching to auto standby when there are no audio or video signals input into this unit. Before the unit enters standby mode, "Auto Standby" is displayed on the unit display and the menu screen.

60 min: 30 min: 15 min: Off (Default):

The unit goes into standby after 60 minutes. The unit goes into standby after 30 minutes. The unit goes into standby after 15 minutes. The unit does not go into standby automatically.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

n ZONE2 / ZONE3

When there are no operations for a certain period of time as set here, the power is automatically shut off even if there is audio or video input.

8 hours:

Switches ZONE2/ZONE3 the standby state after about 8 hours.

4 hours:

Switches ZONE2/ZONE3 to the standby state after about 4 hours.

2 hours:

Switches ZONE2/ZONE3 to the standby state after about 2 hours.

Off (Default):

Does not automatically switch ZONE2/ ZONE3 to the standby state.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

265

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Bluetooth Transmitter

Sets this unit's Bluetooth transmitter.
Set to use Bluetooth headphones to listen to audio playing in the MAIN ZONE.

o Transmitter

Enables or disables the Bluetooth transmitter.

On:
Off (Default):

Enables the Bluetooth transmitter feature.
Disables the Bluetooth transmitter feature.

o Output Mode

Selects the audio output method.

Bluetooth + Speakers (Default):
Bluetooth Only:

Audio is output to Bluetooth headphones and main zone speakers.
Audio is output to Bluetooth headphones only.

o Connected device

Displays the Bluetooth device connected to this unit.

o Device List
0 Available devices are displayed in the list once you start pairing mode on the Bluetooth headphones you want to connect. Select your Bluetooth headphones from the list to pair them.
0 This unit can only pair with one Bluetooth headphone at a time. However, up to 8 Bluetooth headphones can be registered. Switch between registered devices from Device List in the "Bluetooth Transmitter" setup menu.
0 To remove a saved Bluetooth device from the list, use the cursor Up/Down buttons to select it, then press the OPTION button and select "Forget This Device".
0 "Output Mode" can also be set from "Bluetooth Transmitter" in the option menu. 0 A2DP profile-compatible Bluetooth speakers can be connected following the same
steps used to connect Bluetooth headphones.
NOTE 0 Bluetooth transmitter and Bluetooth receiver function cannot be used at the same
time. Settings in this menu are not available when listening to music on a Bluetooth device in any zone. 0 Even when "Transmitter" is set to "On", press Bluetooth on the remote control to select the "Bluetooth" source and enable the Bluetooth receiver function. To listen to music stored on Bluetooth devices such as smartphones on this unit, press Bluetooth on the remote control to switch the input source to Bluetooth, then reconnect the Bluetooth device. 0 Menu settings for Bluetooth Transmitter are not available when this unit is grouped within the HEOS App.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

266

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

ZONE2 Setup / ZONE3 Setup
Makes settings for audio playback with ZONE2 and ZONE3.

0 Values set for "Volume Limit" and "Power On Volume" are displayed according to the setting specified for the volume "Scale". (v p. 194)

o Bass
Adjust bass. -10dB +10dB (Default : 0dB)

o Treble
Adjust treble. -10dB +10dB (Default : 0dB)

o High Pass Filter

Make settings for cutting the low range to reduce distortion in the bass.

On:
Off (Default):

The low range is attenuated. The low range is not attenuated.

o L Ch Level
Adjust the left channel output level. -12 dB +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)

o R Ch Level
Adjust the right channel output level. -12 dB +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)

o Channel

Set whether to playback in stereo or monaural.

Stereo (Default):
Mono:

Stereo playback. Monaural playback.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

267

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o HDMI Audio (ZONE2 only)

Selects the audio signal format for playing an HDMI source in ZONE2.

Through (Default):
PCM:

The HDMI audio signal is passed through this unit to the device in ZONE2.
The HDMI audio signal input into this unit is converted to a PCM signal that can be output from the ZONE2 PRE OUT connectors or speaker terminals.z

z When the same input source is set for both MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, PCM 2channel is used for the audio in MAIN ZONE too. However, it may not be possible to convert the signal from some playback devices to a PCM signal using this setting.
o Volume Level

Set the volume output level.

Variable (Default):
1 98 (79 dB 18 dB):

Volume can be adjusted.
Volume is fixed at the desired level. The volume cannot be adjusting using the remote control unit.

0 The dB value is displayed when the "Scale" setting is " 79.5 dB 18.0 dB". (v p. 194)

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Volume Limit

Make a setting for maximum volume.

60 80 (20 dB 0 dB) (Default : 70 (-10 dB))
Off:

Do not set a maximum volume.

0 This can be set when "Volume Level" is set to "Variable". (v p. 268) 0 The dB value is displayed when the "Scale" setting is " 79.5 dB 18.0 dB".
(v p. 194)
o Power On Volume

Sets the initial volume level when the power is turned on.

Last (Default):
Mute:
1 98 (79 dB 18 dB):

Sets the power-on level to the last-used volume level. Sets the power-on level to mute level.
Sets a specific power-on level.

0 This can be set when "Volume Level" is set to "Variable". (v p. 268)
0 The dB value is displayed when the "Scale" setting is " 79.5 dB 18.0 dB". (v p. 194)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

268

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Mute Level

Set the amount of attenuation when mute is on.

Full (Default): -40 dB :
-20 dB :

Sets the mute level to full mute (no sound).
Sets the mute level to 40 dB lower than the current volume level.
Sets the mute level to 20 dB lower than the current volume level.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Zone Rename

Change the display title of each zone to one you prefer.

MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 / ZONE3

Set Defaults:

The default setting is restored for the edited zone name.

0 Up to 10 characters can be input.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

269

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Quick Select
Sets the "Quick Select" parameters and display name.
o Name
Change the Name that appears on the TV screen to one you prefer.

0 Up to 16 characters can be input.

o Input Source/Master Volume/Sound Mode/ Channel Level/Audyssey Parameters/Restorer/ HDMI Video Output/Playback Content/Speaker Preset/All Zone Stereo/TV Audio Sharing/Dirac Live

Enabled (Default):
Disabled:

The current settings are registered when Quick Select is registered. In addition, when Quick Select is called up, the content of the registered settings is called up.
Settings are not registered when Quick Select is registered. In addition, when Quick Select is called up, the content of the registered settings is not called up.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 "Quick Select" can be set for each Quick Select.
0 When "Input Source" is "Disabled", Video Select information is not registered/ called up either.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

270

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Trigger Out 1 / Trigger Out 2 / Trigger Out 3
Select the conditions for activating trigger out. For details about how to connect the TRIGGER OUT jacks, see "TRIGGER OUT jacks" (v p. 87).
n When setting for zone (MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 / ZONE3)
Trigger out is activated through linkage to the power of the zone set to "On".
n When setting for input source
Activate trigger out when the input source set to "On" is selected.
n When setting for HDMI Out
Activate trigger out when the HDMI Out set to "On" is selected.

On:

Activate trigger on this mode.

Off:

Do not activate trigger on this mode.

Front Display

Makes settings related to the display on this unit.

o Brightness

Adjust the display brightness of this unit.

Bright (Default): Dim: Dark: Off:

Normal display brightness.
Reduced display brightness. Very low display brightness. Turns the display off.

0 You can also adjust the display by pressing DIMMER on the main unit.

o Channel Indicator

Sets whether to use the input signal display or output signal display for the channel indication on the display.

Input:
Output (Default):

Uses the input signal display for the channel indication on the display.
Uses the output signal display for the channel indication on the display.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

271

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Firmware

Checks for the latest firmware information about updates, updates the firmware.

o Check for Update

Check for firmware updates. The firmware can be updated if a firmware update has been released.

Update Now: Update Later:

Execute the update process. When the update starts, the menu screen is shut down. During the update, the progress is shown on the display.
Update later.

0 This unit automatically retries updating if updating fails. If an update still cannot be performed, an "Update Error" message appears in the display. See "Troubleshooting" "Update error messages" for information on update error messages. (v p. 303) Check the conditions according to the message and try the update again.
0 This menu cannot be selected when "Allow Update" is set to "Off".

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Auto-Update

Turns on Automatic Updates so that feature updates are automatically downloaded and installed when this unit is in standby mode.

n Auto-Update

This unit will automatically update to the newest firmware when in standby mode.

On:
Off (Default):

Turns on Automatic Updates. Turns off Automatic Updates.

n Time Zone
Change the time zone. Set the time zone that matches the area where you live.

0 This menu cannot be selected when "Allow Update" is set to "Off".

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

272

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Allow Update

Enable or disable updates for this unit.

On (Default):
Off:

Enables this unit to receive updates. Prevents this unit from receiving update.

0 This setting causes Incompatibilities between this unit and HEOS App.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Notes concerning use of "Update"
0 In order to use these functions, you must have the correct system requirements and settings for an Internet connection. (v p. 84)
0 Do not turn off the power until updating is completed.
0 Approximately 1 hour is required for the updating procedure to be completed.
0 Once updating starts, normal operations on this unit cannot be performed until updating is completed. Furthermore, there may be cases where backup data is reset for the parameters, etc., set on this unit.
0 If the update fails, press and hold the X on the main unit for more than 5 seconds, or remove and re-insert the power cord. After about 1 minute, "Please wait" appears on the display and update restarts. If the error continues, check the network environment.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

273

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Information

Show information about this unit settings, input signals, etc.

o Audio

Show the audio information for MAIN ZONE.

Sound Mode: Input Signal: Format: Sample Rate: Offset:
Flag:

The currently set sound mode.
The input signal type.
The number of input signal channels (presence of front, surround, LFE).
The input signal's sampling frequency.
The dialogue normalization correction value.
This is displayed when inputting signals including a surround back channel. "MATRIX" is displayed with DTS-ES Matrix input signals, "DISCRETE" with DTS-ES Discrete signals.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Video
Show the HDMI input/output signals and HDMI TV information for MAIN ZONE.
HDMI Signal Info. Resolution / HDR / Color Space / Pixel Depth / ALLM / QFT / FRL Rate
TV 1 Info. / TV 2 Info. Interface / HDR / Resolutions / Enhanced Features / Max FRL Rate

0 A or B may be displayed at the end of resolution. A represents uncompressed video and B represents compressed video.
0 Refer to "About HDMI" for more information about ALLM, QFT and FRL. (v p. 309)

o ZONE

Show information about current settings.

MAIN ZONE: ZONE2/3:

This item shows information about settings for MAIN ZONE. The information displayed differs according to the input source.
This item shows information about settings for ZONE2 and ZONE3.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

274

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Firmware

Version: DTS Version:

Displays information for the current firmware.
Displays the current DTS version.

o Notifications

Displays and sets notifications.
Also, sets whether or not to display the notification when the power is turned on.

Notification Alerts

On (Default):
Off:

Notification messages are displayed. Notification messages are not displayed.

0 Pressing INFO on the remote control switches the display to show information such as the input source name, the volume, the sound mode name, the video input/output signals, and other information. The FRL Rate is displayed when the "4K/8K Signal Format" setting of this unit is "8K Enhanced" and the connected TV supports FRL transmission mode.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

SOURCE Blu-ray SIGNAL Dolby Audio - Dolby TrueHD

SOUND Dolby Audio - TrueHD + DSurr

40.0

INPUT SIGNAL

FHL LFE

EXT FHR

FWL FL C FR FWR

SBL SB SBR

ACTIVE SPEAKERS

FHL SW

FHR

FL C FR

RHL SBL

SBR RHR

SOURCE Blu-ray SIGNAL Dolby Audio - Dolby TrueHD

SOUND Dolby Audio - TrueHD + DSurr

40.0
SOURCE Blu-ray SIGNAL Dolby Audio - Dolby TrueHD

AUDYSSEY

MultEQ XT32 : Reference

Dynamic EQ

: On

Dynamic Volume : Medium

SOUND Dolby Audio - TrueHD + DSurr

Front panel

Display

Resolution HDR Color Space Pixel Depth FRL Rate

:8K24A :HDR10 :YCbCr 4:2:2/BT.2020 :12bits :40Gbps

=>8K24A =>HDR10 =>YCbCr 4:2:2/BT.2020 =>12bits =>40Gbps

ALLM

Rear panel

275

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Usage Data

To help us improve our products and customer service, Denon collects anonymous information about how you use this unit (such as frequently used input sources and sound modes and speaker settings).
Denon will never provide any information we collect to third parties.

Yes:

Provide information on the operating status of this unit.

No:

Do not provide information on the operating status of this unit.

Save & Load
Save and restore device settings by using a USB memory device.
0 Use a USB memory device that has at least 128 MB of free space and is formatted to FAT32. Data may not Save/Load correctly to some USB memory devices.
0 It may take up to 10 minutes for data to Save/Load. Do not turn off the power until the process is complete.
o Save Configuration
Current unit settings are stored on the USB memory device. When the settings are saved correctly, "Saved" appears on the display and the file "config.avr" is created on the USB memory device.

0 Do not change the file name of the created file. Doing so will prevent the file from being recognized as a settings file when restoring.
o Load Configuration
Settings saved on the USB memory device are restored. When the saved settings are restored correctly, "Loaded" appears on the display and the unit automatically restarts.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

276

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Setup Lock

Protect settings from inadvertent changes.
o Lock

On:
Off (Default):

Turn protection on. Turn protection off.

0 When cancelling the setting, set "Lock" to "Off".
NOTE 0 When "Lock" is set to "On", no setting items are displayed except for "Setup
Lock".

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Reset
Returns settings to the factory default. Initialization can be performed for all unit settings or for Network settings only.
o All Settings
All settings are reset to the factory default values.
o Network Settings
Only network settings are reset to the factory default values.

0 Before returning the settings to the default settings, use the "Save & Load" function from the menu to save and restore the details of various settings configured on the unit. (v p. 276)
0 The "Reset" operation can also be performed by using the button on the main unit. For details on resetting all of the settings to the factory defaults see "Resetting factory settings" (v p. 304), and for details on resetting the network settings to the factory defaults see "Resetting network settings" (v p. 305).
NOTE
0 Do not disconnect the power or turn the device off during network settings initialization.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

277

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Specifying the zone used with the remote control unit

MAIN ZONE2

ZONE3

To prevent accidental misuse, you can set the zone for which the remote control unit is used.

1 Press and hold down either MAIN, ZONE2 or ZONE3 and SETUP at the same time until the MAIN, ZONE2 and ZONE3 buttons blink.

MAIN:
ZONE2:
ZONE3 (Default):

When only using MAIN ZONE
When using MAIN ZONE and ZONE2
When using MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3

SETUP

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

278

Remote

Index

Contents
o Contents

Connections

Playback

Tips

I want the volume not to become too loud by mistake

280

I want to keep the volume at the same level when I turn the power

280

I want to have the subwoofer always output audio

280

I want to make human voices in the movies clearer

280

I want to keep bass and clarity during playback at a lower volume

level

280

I want to automatically adjust the volume level difference in content

such as TV and movies

280

I want to set the optimized listening environment after changing the

configuration/position of the speakers or changing a speaker to a

new one

281

I want to combine a desired video with the current music

281

I want to skip unused input sources

281

I want to enjoy the same music in all zones at the home party, etc. 281

I want to minimize the delay in video signals when I'm playing a

game on my game console

281

I want to use the external power amplifier to the Front channel for

my 13.1-channel speaker system

281

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Troubleshooting

Power does not turn on / Power is turned off

283

Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit

284

Display on this unit shows nothing

284

No sound comes out

285

Desired sound does not come out

286

Sound is interrupted or noise occurs

290

No video is shown on the TV

291

The menu screen is not displayed on the TV

293

The color of the menu screen and operations content displayed on

the television is different from normal

293

AirPlay cannot be played back

294

USB memory devices cannot be played back

295

Bluetooth cannot be played back

296

The Internet radio cannot be played back

298

Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back

299

Various online services cannot be played

300

The HDMI Control function does not work

300

Cannot connect to a wireless LAN network

301

When using HDMI ZONE2, the devices does not function properly 302

Update error messages

303

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

279

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Tips

I want the volume not to become too loud by mistake 0 Set the volume upper limit for "Volume Limit" in the menu beforehand. This prevents children or others from increasing the volume too much by mistake.
You can set this for each zone. ("Volume" (v p. 194), "Volume Limit" (v p. 268))
I want to keep the volume at the same level when I turn the power on 0 By default, the volume setting when power was previously set to standby on this unit is applied at next power on with no change. To use a fixed volume
level, set the volume level at power on for "Power On Volume" in the menu. You can set this for each zone. ("Volume" (v p. 194), "Power On Volume" (v p. 268))
I want to have the subwoofer always output audio 0 Depending on the input signals and sound mode, the subwoofer may not output audio. When "Subwoofer Output" in the menu is set to "LFE + Main",
you can have the subwoofer always output audio. (v p. 246)
I want to make human voices in the movies clearer 0 Select a setting that makes the dialog easier to hear in the option menu "Dialog Enhancer". (v p. 133)
I want to keep bass and clarity during playback at a lower volume level 0 Set "Dynamic EQ" in the menu to "On". This setting corrects the frequency characteristics to allow you to enjoy clear sound without the bass being lost
even during playback at a lower volume level. (v p. 196)
I want to automatically adjust the volume level difference in content such as TV and movies 0 Set "Dynamic Volume" in the menu. Volume level changes (between quiet scenes and loud scenes) in TV shows or movies are automatically adjusted
to your desired level. (v p. 197)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

280

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

I want to set the optimized listening environment after changing the configuration/position of the speakers or changing a speaker to a new one 0 Perform Audyssey® Setup. This automatically makes the optimized speaker settings for the new listening environment. (v p. 215)
I want to combine a desired video with the current music 0 Set "Video Select" in the option menu to "On". You can combine the current music with your desired video source from a Set-top Box or Blu-ray, etc.
while listening to music from the Tuner, CD, Phono, HEOS Music, USB or Bluetooth. (v p. 138)
I want to skip unused input sources 0 Set unused input sources for "Hide Sources" in the menu. This allows you to skip unused input sources when turning the SOURCE SELECT knob on
this unit. (v p. 213)
I want to enjoy the same music in all zones at the home party, etc. 0 Set "All Zone Stereo" in the option menu to "Start". You can simultaneously play back music in another room (ZONE2, ZONE3) that is played back in
MAIN ZONE. (v p. 139)
I want to minimize the delay in video signals when I'm playing a game on my game console 0 When the video is delayed against button operations with the controller on the game console, set "Video Mode" in the menu to "Game". (v p. 205)
I want to use the external power amplifier to the Front channel for my 13.1-channel speaker system 0 Set the "Connection" setting of front speakers to "Pre-out Only" to connect your external power amplifier for front channels. (v p. 228)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

281

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Troubleshooting
If a problem should arise, first check the following: 1. Are the connections correct? 2. Is the set being operated as described in the owner's manual? 3. Are the other devices operating properly?

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 If steps 1 to 3 above do not improve the problem, restarting the device may improve the problem. Continue pressing the X button on the unit until "Restart" appears in the display, or remove and re-insert the power cord of the unit.
If this unit does not operate properly, check the corresponding symptoms in this section. If the symptoms do not match any of those described here, consult your dealer as it could be due to a fault in this unit. In this case, disconnect the power immediately and contact the store where you purchased this unit.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

282

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Power does not turn on / Power is turned off
Power does not turn on. 0 Check whether the power plug is correctly inserted into the power outlet. (v p. 88)
Power automatically turns off. 0 The sleep timer is set. Turn on the power again. (v p. 156) 0 "Auto Standby" is set. "Auto Standby" is triggered when there is no operation for a set amount of time. To disable "Auto Standby", set "Auto Standby" on
the menu to "Off". (v p. 265)
Power turns off and the power indicator flashes in red approx. every 2 seconds. 0 The protection circuit has been activated due to a rise in temperature within this unit. Turn the power off, wait about an hour until this unit cools down
sufficiently, and then turn the power on again. (v p. 336) 0 Please re-install this unit in a place having good ventilation.
Power turns off and the power indicator flashes in red approx. every 0.5 seconds. 0 Check the speaker connections. The protection circuit may have been activated because speaker cable core wires came in contact with each other or a
core wire was disconnected from the connector and came in contact with the rear panel of this unit. After unplugging the power cord, take corrective action such as firmly re-twisting the core wire or taking care of the connector, and then reconnect the wire. (v p. 40) 0 Turn down the volume and turn on the power again. (v p. 90) 0 This unit's amplifier circuit has failed. Unplug the power cord and contact our customer service center.
Power does not turn off even when the power button is pressed, and the display shows "ZONE2 On" or "ZONE3 On". 0 The power supply of ZONE2 or ZONE3 is turned to ON. To turn off the power supply of this unit (standby), press the ZONE2 ON/OFF or ZONE3
ON/OFF on the main unit, or press the POWER X button after pressing the ZONE2 or ZONE3 button on the remote control unit to turn off the power supply of ZONE2 or ZONE3.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

283

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit
Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit. 0 Batteries are worn out. Replace with new batteries. (v p. 10) 0 Operate the remote control unit within a distance of about 23 ft/7 m from this unit and at an angle of within 30°. (v p. 10) 0 Remove any obstacle between this unit and the remote control unit. 0 Insert the batteries in the proper direction, checking the q and w marks. (v p. 10) 0 The set's remote control sensor is exposed to strong light (direct sunlight, inverter type fluorescent bulb light, etc.). Move the set to a place in which the
remote control sensor will not be exposed to strong light. 0 The operation target zone does not correspond to the zone setting specified on the remote control unit. Press the MAIN or ZONE2 button to select the
operating zone of the remote control. (v p. 183) 0 When using a 3D video device, the remote control unit of this unit may not function due to effects of infrared communications between units (such as TV
and glasses for 3D viewing). In this case, adjust the direction of units with the 3D communications function and their distance to ensure they do not affect operations from the remote control unit of this unit.
Display on this unit shows nothing
Display is off. 0 Set "Brightness" on the menu to something other than "Off". (v p. 271) 0 When the sound mode is set to "Pure Direct", the display is off. (v p. 144)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

284

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

No sound comes out
No sound comes out of speakers. 0 Check the connections for all devices. (v p. 40) 0 Insert connection cables all the way in. 0 Check that input connectors and output connectors are not reversely connected. 0 Check cables for damage. 0 Check that speaker cables are properly connected. Check that cable core wires come in contact with the metal part on speaker terminals. (v p. 40) 0 Securely tighten the speaker terminals. Check speaker terminals for looseness. (v p. 40) 0 Check that a proper input source is selected. (v p. 90) 0 Adjust the volume. (v p. 91) 0 Cancel the mute mode. (v p. 91) 0 Check the digital audio input connector setting. (v p. 210) 0 Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some devices, the digital audio output is set to off by default. 0 When a headphone is plugged into the PHONES jack on the main unit, sound is not output from the speaker terminal and PRE OUT connector. 0 Audio is output to your Bluetooth headphones, but not to speakers or pre-outs when "Output Mode" set to "Bluetooth Only". Change "Output Mode" to
"Bluetooth + Speakers" to output audio from your Bluetooth headphones as well as your speakers or pre-outs. (v p. 266)
No sound comes out when using the DVI-D connection.
0 When this unit is connected to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector, no sound is output. Make a separate audio connection.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

285

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Desired sound does not come out
The volume does not increase. 0 The maximum volume is set too low. Set the maximum volume using "Limit" on the menu. (v p. 194) 0 Appropriate volume correction processing is performed according to the input audio format and settings, so the volume may not reach the upper limit.
The Bluetooth headphones do not have volume control and the volume is too low or too high. 0 Control the volume by adjusting the "Level" of the "Bluetooth Transmitter" from the option menu. (v p. 102)
The Bluetooth headphones have a volume control function but the volume is still too low or too high. 0 Control the volume by adjusting the "Level" of the "Bluetooth Transmitter" from the option menu. (v p. 102)
No sound comes out with the HDMI connection. 0 Check the connection of the HDMI connectors. (v p. 73) 0 When outputting HDMI audio from the speakers, set "HDMI Audio Out" on the menu to "AVR". To output from the TV, set "TV". (v p. 200) 0 When using the HDMI Control function, check that the audio output is set to the AV amplifier on the TV. (v p. 155)
When an eARC function-compatible television is connected, television audio is not output from the speaker connected to this unit 0 eARC function settings may be required depending on the eARC function-compatible television you are using. Make sure eARC is set to on if this
setting exists on your television. For more information, check your television's owner's manual. 0 Make sure the input source of this unit is "TV Audio". 0 The eARC function does not operate when the HDMI input connector is set to the "TV Audio" input source. To enable eARC function operation, remove
the HDMI input connector setting, then restart this unit and the television. (v p. 211)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

286

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

No sound comes out of a specific speaker.
0 Check that speaker cables are properly connected. 0 Check that a selection other than "No" is set for the "Speaker Layout" setting in menu. (v p. 226) 0 Check the "Amp Assign" setting in the menu. (v p. 226) 0 When the sound mode is "Stereo", audio is only output from the front speakers and subwoofer. 0 Audio is not output from the surround back speaker if "Speaker Virtualizer" is set to "On" when "Speaker Layout" - "Surround Back" is set to "1 spkr" in
the menu. (v p. 187) 0 When "Speaker Layout" - "Surround Back" is set to "2 spkrs", "Speaker Layout" - "Center" is set to "Yes", and sound mode is set to "IMAX DTS",
surround audio is output from the surround back speaker. Audio is not output from the surround speaker. (v p. 228)
No sound is produced from subwoofer.
0 Check the subwoofer connections. 0 Turn on the subwoofer's power. 0 Set "Speaker Layout" - "Subwoofers" in the menu to "1 spkr", "2 spkrs", "3 spkrs" or "4 spkrs". (v p. 235) 0 When "Crossovers" - "Front" in the menu is set to "Full Range", depending on the input signal and the sound mode, no sound may be output from the
subwoofer. (v p. 244) 0 When no subwoofer audio signal (LFE) is included in the input signals, no sound may be output from the subwoofer. (v p. 246) 0 You can make the subwoofer always output sound by setting the "Subwoofer Output" to "LFE + Main". (v p. 246)
DTS sound is not output.
0 Check that the digital audio output setting on the connected device is set to "DTS".

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

287

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Dolby Atmos, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD, Dolby Digital Plus audio is not output. 0 Make HDMI connections. (v p. 76) 0 Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some devices, "PCM" is set by default.
DTS Neural:X mode cannot be selected. 0 DTS Neural:X cannot be selected when using the headphones.
Dolby Surround mode cannot be selected. 0 Dolby Surround cannot be selected when using the headphones.
IMAX DTS:X cannot be selected. 0 IMAX DTS:X and IMAX DTS cannot be selected but DTS:X and DTS can be selected, when the headphones are used.
Sound modes other than "Stereo" or "Direct" cannot be selected. 0 Only "Stereo" or "Direct" can be selected for the sound mode if Headphone:X signals are input.
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and Audyssey LFCTM cannot be selected. 0 These cannot be selected when you have not performed Audyssey® Setup. (v p. 215) 0 Switch to a sound mode other than "Direct" or "Pure Direct". (v p. 143) 0 Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and Audyssey LFCTM cannot be selected when sound mode is "DTS Virtual:X" or sound mode
that have "+ Virtual:X" in the sound mode name. 0 These cannot be selected when using the headphones.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

288

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Dirac Live can not be selected. 0 This cannot be selected when you have not perforned Dirac Live Room Correction. "Dirac Live Setup" (v p. 252) 0 This cannot be selected when using the headphone. 0 Dirac Live cannot be used when the "Speaker Layout" is changed to different settings from the settings that were used when Dirac Live Room
Correction was performed.
"Restorer" cannot be selected.
0 Check that an analog signal or PCM signal (Sample Rate = 44.1/48 kHz) is input. For playback of multichannel signals such as Dolby Digital or DTS surround, "Restorer" cannot be used. (v p. 193)
0 Switch to a sound mode other than "Direct" or "Pure Direct". (v p. 143)
No audio is output from PRE OUT or speakers for ZONE2/ZONE3.
0 In ZONE2/ZONE3, the audio can be played back when signals input from digital connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) are in 2ch PCM format. 0 In ZONE2, the audio can be played back when signals input from the HDMI connector are in 2ch PCM format. To play back the audio in ZONE2
irrespective of the input signal format, set "HDMI Audio" in the menu to "PCM". Depending on the played back device, the audio may not be played back even with this setting. In that case, set the audio format to "PCM (2ch)" on the played back device. (v p. 268) 0 When listening to audio from a Bluetooth device in ZONE2/ZONE3, remove any obstructions between the Bluetooth device and this unit and use it within a range of about 98.4 ft/30 m.
Sound mode settings are not available when using Bluetooth headphones. Audio menu settings are also not available.
0 This unit cannot change sound mode or audio menu settings for audio output to Bluetooth headphones.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

289

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Sound is interrupted or noise occurs
During playback from the Internet radio or USB memory device, sound is occasionally interrupted.
0 When the transfer speed of the USB memory device is slow, sound may occasionally be interrupted. 0 The network communication speed is slow or the radio station is busy.
When making a call on iPhone, noise occurs in audio output on this unit.
0 When making a call, keep a distance of 0.7 ft/20 cm or longer between iPhone and this unit.
Noise often occurs in FM/AM broadcasting. 0 Change the antenna orientation or position. (v p. 82) 0 Separate the AM loop antenna from the unit. 0 Use an outdoor antenna. (v p. 82) 0 Separate the antenna from other connection cables. (v p. 82)
The sounds appear to be distorted. 0 Lower the volume. (v p. 91) 0 Set "Off" to the "ECO Mode". When "On" or "Auto" is in the "ECO Mode", the audio may by distorted when the playback volume is high. (v p. 262)
Sound cuts out when using Wi-Fi connection.
0 The frequency band used by the wireless LAN is also used by microwave ovens, cordless telephones, wireless game controllers and other wireless LAN devices. Using such devices at the same time as this unit may cause sound to cut out due to electronic interference. Sound cut out can be improved using the following methods. (v p. 84) - Install devices that cause interference away from this unit. - Turn off the power supply to devices that cause interference. - Change the settings of the router channel to which this unit is connected to. (See the instruction manual of the wireless router for details on how to change the channel.) - Switch to a wired LAN connection.
0 Particularly when you play back large music files, depending on your wireless LAN environment, the playback sound may be interrupted. In this case, make the wired LAN connection. (v p. 254)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

290

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

No video is shown on the TV
No picture appears. 0 Check the connections for all devices. (v p. 73) 0 Insert connection cables all the way in. 0 Check that input connectors and output connectors are not reversely connected. 0 Check cables for damage. 0 Match the input settings to the input connector of the TV connected to this unit. (v p. 210) 0 Check that the proper input source is selected. (v p. 90) 0 Check the video input connector setting. (v p. 210) 0 Check that the resolution of the player corresponds to that of the TV. (v p. 274) 0 Check whether the TV is compatible with copyright protection (HDCP). If connected to a device not compatible with HDCP, video will not be output
correctly. (v p. 310) 0 To enjoy content that is copyright protected by HDCP 2.2 or HDCP 2.3, use a playback device and TV compatible with HDCP 2.2 or HDCP 2.3. 0 To play back a 4K video, use a "High Speed HDMI Cable" or a "High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet". In order to achieve a higher fidelity for 4K
videos, it is recommended to use a "Premium High Speed HDMI Cables" or a "Premium High Speed HDMI Cables with Ethernet" that has an HDMI Premium Certified Cable label on the product package. 0 Use a certified "Ultra High Speed HDMI cable" to enjoy 8K or 4K 120Hz video. If you use a different HDMI cable, the video may not display or other problems may occur.
No video is shown on the TV with the DVI-D connection.
0 With the DVI-D connection, on some device combinations, devices may not function properly due to the copy guard copyright protection (HDCP). (v p. 310)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

291

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

While the menu is being displayed, no video is shown on the TV. 0 The video being played will not appear in the background of the menu when the menu is operated.
When using HDMI ZONE2, the video output in MAIN ZONE is interrupted. 0 When ZONE2 is operated with the same input source selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, video in MAIN ZONE may be interrupted.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

292

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

The menu screen is not displayed on the TV
The menu screen or status information screen is not displayed on the TV. 0 The status information will not appear on the TV when the following video signals are being played.
- Some images of 3D video content - Computer resolution images (example: VGA) - Video with an aspect ratio other than 16:9 or 4:3 - Some kind of HDR signals - Some kind of game contents - Compressed video 0 When a 2D video is converted to a 3D video on the TV, the menu screen or status information screen is not displayed properly. (v p. 275) 0 In the pure direct playback mode, the menu screen or status information is not displayed. Switch to a sound mode other than the pure direct mode. (v p. 142)
The color of the menu screen and operations content displayed on the television is different from normal
The color of the menu screen and operations content displayed on the television is different. 0 Performing operations on this unit during playback of a Dolby Vision signal may cause variance in the color display of the menu screen and operations
content. This is a characteristic of the Dolby Vision signal and is not a malfunction.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

293

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

AirPlay cannot be played back
The AirPlay icon is not displayed on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad. 0 This unit and PC / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad are not connected to the same network (LAN). Connect it to the same LAN as this unit. (v p. 84) 0 The firmware on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is not compatible with AirPlay. Update the firmware to the latest version.
Audio is not output. 0 The volume on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is set to the minimum level. The volume on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is linked with the
volume on this unit. Set a proper volume level. 0 The AirPlay playback is not performed, or this unit is not selected. Click the AirPlay icon on the iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad screen and select this
unit. (v p. 128)
Audio is interrupted during the AirPlay playback on iPhone / iPod touch / iPad. 0 Quit the application running in the background of the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad, and then play using AirPlay. 0 Some external factors may be affecting the wireless connection. Modify the network environment by taking measures such as shortening the distance
from the wireless LAN access point.
iTunes cannot be played back through the remote control unit. 0 Enable the "Allow iTunes audio control from remote speakers" setting on iTunes. Then, you can perform playback, pause, and skip operations through
the remote control unit.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

294

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

USB memory devices cannot be played back
USB memory device is not recognized. 0 Disconnect and reconnect the USB memory device. (v p. 81) 0 Mass storage class compatible USB memory devices are supported. 0 This unit does not support a connection through a USB hub. Connect the USB memory device directly to the USB port. 0 The USB memory device must be formatted to "FAT32" or "NTFS". 0 Not all USB memory devices are guaranteed to work. Some USB memory devices are not recognized. When using a type of portable hard disc drive
compatible with the USB connection that requires power from an AC adapter, use the AC adapter that came with the drive.
Files on the USB memory device are not displayed. 0 Files of a type not supported by this unit are not displayed. (v p. 92) 0 This unit is able to display files in a maximum of eight folder layers. A maximum of 5000 files (folders) can also be displayed for each layer. Modify the
folder structure of the USB memory device. 0 When multiple partitions exist on the USB memory device, only files on the first partition are displayed.
iOS and Android devices are not recognized. 0 The USB port of this unit does not support playback from iOS and Android devices.
Files on a USB memory device cannot be played. 0 Files are created in a format that is not supported by this unit. Check the formats supported by this unit. (v p. 313) 0 You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected. Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this unit. 0 Playback may not be possible if the album art file size exceeds 2 MB.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

295

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Bluetooth cannot be played back
Bluetooth devices cannot be connected to this unit.
0 The Bluetooth function in the Bluetooth device has not been enabled. See the Owner's Manual of the Bluetooth device to enable the Bluetooth function. 0 Bring the Bluetooth device near to this unit. 0 The Bluetooth device cannot connect with this unit if it is not compatible with the A2DP profile. 0 Turn the power of the Bluetooth device off and on again, and then try again.
Smartphones and other Bluetooth devices cannot be connected.
0 Smartphones and other Bluetooth devices cannot be connected when "Transmitter" is set to "On". Press Bluetooth on the remote control to switch the input source to Bluetooth, then connect the device. (v p. 266)
Cannot connect Bluetooth headphones.
0 Bring the Bluetooth headphones near to this unit. 0 Turn the power of the Bluetooth headphones off and on again, and then try again. 0 Go to "General" - "Bluetooth Transmitter", and set "Transmitter" to "On" within the menu. (v p. 266) 0 Make sure this unit is not already connected to another pair of Bluetooth headphones. Check the currently connected Bluetooth headphones by
pressing INFO on the remote control or STATUS button on the unit. Disconnect the connected Bluetooth headphones before connecting the ones you want to use. 0 Bluetooth headphones cannot be connected if Bluetooth is being used as an input source in any zone. 0 Bluetooth headphones cannot be connected if this unit is grouped in the HEOS App. Remove this unit from the group to enable Bluetooth headphones connection. 0 The Bluetooth headphones cannot connect with this unit if it is not compatible with the A2DP profile. 0 Connection and operation are not guaranteed for all Bluetooth-enabled devices. 0 This unit can only connect to one Bluetooth headphone at a time. However, up to 8 Bluetooth headphones can be registered. You can switch between registered devices from "Device List" in the "Bluetooth Transmitter" menu. (v p. 266)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

296

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

The sound is cut off. 0 Bring the Bluetooth device near to this unit. 0 Remove obstructions between the Bluetooth device and this unit. 0 To prevent electromagnetic interference, locate this unit away from microwave ovens, wireless LAN devices and other Bluetooth devices. 0 Reconnect the Bluetooth device.
The sound is cut off or noise occurs when using Bluetooth headphones. 0 Move the Bluetooth headphones closer to this unit. 0 Remove obstructions between the Bluetooth headphones and this unit. 0 Reconnect the Bluetooth headphones. 0 To prevent electromagnetic interference, locate this unit away from microwave ovens, wireless LAN devices and other Bluetooth devices. 0 We recommend using wired LAN to connect this unit and other devices. 0 Bluetooth transmits on the 2.4 GHz band which may interfere with Wi-Fi transmitted on this band. Connect this unit and other devices to Wi-Fi network
on a 5 GHz band if available on your Wi-Fi router.
Audio is delayed on my Bluetooth headphones. 0 This unit cannot adjust audio delay on Bluetooth headphones.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

297

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

The Internet radio cannot be played back
A list of broadcasting stations is not displayed. 0 The LAN cable is not properly connected, or the network is disconnected. Check the connection status. (v p. 84) 0 Perform the network diagnostic mode.
Internet Radio cannot be played. 0 The selected radio station is broadcasting in a format that is not supported by this unit. Formats that can be played back in this unit are MP3, WMA and
AAC. (v p. 316) 0 The firewall function is enabled on the router. Check the firewall setting. 0 The IP address is not properly set. (v p. 256) 0 Check the power of the router is on. 0 To obtain the IP address automatically, enable the DHCP server function on the router. Also, set the DHCP setting to "On" on this unit. (v p. 256) 0 To obtain the IP address manually, set the IP address on this unit. (v p. 256) 0 Some radio stations broadcast silently during some time period. In this case, no audio is output. Wait for a while and select the same radio station, or
select another radio station. (v p. 113) 0 The selected radio station is not in service. Select a radio station in service.
Cannot connect to favorite radio stations. 0 Radio station is not currently in service. Register radio stations in service.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

298

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back
Files stored on a computer cannot be played. 0 Files are stored in a non-compatible format. Record in a compatible format. (v p. 315) 0 Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this unit. 0 The USB port of this unit cannot be used for connection to a computer. 0 Media sharing settings on the server or NAS do not allow this unit. Change the settings to allow this unit. For details, see the owner's manual of the
server or NAS.
Server is not found, or it is not possible to connect to the server. 0 The computer's or router's firewall is activated. Check the computer's or router's firewall settings. 0 Computer's power is not turned on. Turn on the power. 0 Server is not running. Launch the server. 0 IP address of this unit is wrong. Check the IP address of this unit. (v p. 253)
Music files on PC cannot be played back. 0 Even if PC is connected to the USB port on this unit, music files on it cannot be played back. Connect PC to this unit through the network. (v p. 84)
Files on PC or NAS are not displayed. 0 Files of a type not supported by this unit are not displayed. (v p. 315)
Music stored on a NAS cannot be played. 0 If you use a NAS in conformity with the DLNA standard, enable the DLNA server function in the NAS setting. 0 If you use a NAS that does not conform with the DLNA standard, play the music via a PC. Set Windows Media Player's media sharing function and add
NAS to the selected play folder. 0 If connection is restricted, set audio equipment as the connection target.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

299

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Various online services cannot be played
Various online services cannot be played. 0 The online service may have been discontinued.
The HDMI Control function does not work
The HDMI Control function does not work. 0 Check that "HDMI Control" in the menu is set to "On". (v p. 202) 0 You cannot operate devices that are not compatible with the HDMI Control function. In addition, depending on the connected device or the settings, the
HDMI Control function may not work. In this case, operate the external device directly. (v p. 155) 0 Check that the HDMI Control function setting is enabled on all devices connected to this unit. (v p. 155) 0 When you make connection related changes such as connecting an additional HDMI device, the link operation settings may be initialized. Turn off this
unit and devices connected via HDMI, and turn them on again. (v p. 155) 0 The HDMI OUT TV 2 connector is not compatible with the HDMI Control function. Use the HDMI OUT TV 1 connector to connect to the TV. (v p. 73)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

300

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Cannot connect to a wireless LAN network
Cannot connect to the network. 0 The network name (SSID), password and encryption setting have not been set up correctly. Configure the network settings according to the setting
details of this unit. (v p. 255) 0 Shorten the distance from the wireless LAN access point and remove any obstructions to improve access first before re-connecting again. Place the
unit away from microwave ovens and other network access points. 0 Configure the access point channel settings away from channels that are being used by other networks. 0 This unit is not compatible with WEP (TSN).
Cannot connect to a WPS Router. 0 Check that the WPS mode of the router is operating. 0 Press the WPS button on the router and then press the "Connect" button displayed on the TV within 2 minutes. 0 A router/settings that are compatible with WPS 2.0 standards are required. Set the encryption type to "None", "WPA-PSK (AES)" or WPA2-PSK (AES).
(v p. 255) 0 If the router encryption method is WEP/WPA-TKIP/WPA2-TKIP/WPA3-SAE (AES), you cannot connect by using the WPS button on the router. In this
case, use the "Scan Networks" or "Manual" method to connect.
Cannot connect to the network using iPhone/iPod touch/iPad. 0 Update the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad firmware to the latest version. 0 When configuring the settings via a wireless connection, iOS 10.0.2 or later needs to be supported.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

301

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

When using HDMI ZONE2, the devices does not function properly
When using MAIN ZONE, video output is interrupted in HDMI ZONE2. 0 With the same input source selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, when you operate MAIN ZONE, video may be interrupted in HDMI ZONE2.
When using HDMI ZONE2, no video or audio is output from the TV in ZONE2. 0 Check that the power is on for ZONE2. (v p. 175) 0 Check the input source for ZONE2. (v p. 175) 0 In ZONE2, playback is only possible when the input signals are HDMI signals. 0 When the TV does not support the input audio format, audio is not output. Set the audio format to "PCM" on the playback device. Alternatively, set
"ZONE2 Setup" - "HDMI Audio" in the menu to "PCM". (v p. 268) 0 When the TV is not compatible with the resolution of the input video, no video is output. Set the output resolution on the playback device to a resolution
that is compatible with the TV.
When using HDMI ZONE2, MAIN ZONE audio is played back as PCM. 0 When the same input source is selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, the audio format is limited according to the specifications of the TV in ZONE2.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

302

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Update error messages

If an update is interrupted or fails, an error message appears.

Display

Description

Connection failed. Please check your network, then try The network connection is unstable.

again.

Connection to the server failed.

Check your network environment and try the update again.

Update failed. Please check your network, then try again.

The download of the firmware failed. Check your network environment and try the update again.

Please check your network, unplug and reconnect the power cord, and try again.

The update failed. Press and hold the X on the main unit for more than 5 seconds, or remove and re-insert the power cord. The update restarts automatically.

Please contact customer service in your area.

This unit may be broken. Contact our Customer Service Center in your area.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

303

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Resetting factory settings

If the indicators are incorrect or the unit cannot be operated, restarting the unit may improve the problem. We recommend restarting the unit before returning the settings to the default settings. (v p. 282)
If the operations are not improved by restarting the unit, follow the steps below.
Various settings are reset to the factory default values. Make settings again.

INFO

1 Turn off the power using X.

2 Press X while simultaneously pressing INFO and BACK.

3 Remove your fingers from the two buttons when "Initialized" appears on the display.

BACK

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

304

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Resetting network settings

If network contents cannot be played or the unit cannot connect to the network, restarting the unit may improve the problem. We recommend restarting the unit before returning the settings to the default settings. (v p. 282) If the operations are not improved by restarting the unit, follow the steps below. Network settings are reset to the factory default values. Make settings again. However, the menu "Speaker Layout" and "Video" settings are not reset.

SOURCE SELECT

DIMMER

1 Press X to turn on power to the unit. 2 Turn SOURCE SELECT to select "HEOS Music".

3 Press and hold the main unit's DIMMER and cursor Right at the same time for at least 3 seconds.

4 Remove your fingers from the two buttons when "Network Reset..." appears on the display.

Cursor Right

5 "Completed" is shown in the display when reset is complete.

0 Before returning the settings to the default settings, use the "Save & Load" function from the menu to save and restore the details of various settings configured on the unit. (v p. 276)
0 You can also reset the network settings to the factory defaults using "Reset" "Network Settings" in the menu. (v p. 277)
NOTE 0 Do not turn the power off until reset is complete.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

305

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Factory Restore

When the unit or the network functions do not work properly, operation may be improved by performing the Factory Restore. Do this when the unit still does not work properly even after trying the steps for "Resetting factory settings" or "Resetting network settings". (v p. 304, 305)
After performing the Factory Restore, various settings are reset to the default settings. Configure the network settings and update the firmware again.

DIMMER

1 Press X while simultaneously pressing SETUP and DIMMER.

2 When "Restoring" appears on the display, release the buttons.
When the Factory Restore is complete, "Completed" appears on the display for about 5 seconds, and the unit automatically restarts.

SETUP

WARNING
By initiating Factory Restore mode, you will be installing limited recovery firmware on this unit. Functionality will remain limited until a firmware update is performed over the Internet. Do not perform a Factory Restore if you do not have this unit connected to your home network.

0 This operation takes time because it requires reconnecting to the network, restoring and updating the firmware.
0 If this operation does not improve the problem, contact our customer service center.
NOTE 0 Do not turn off the power until the Factory Restore is complete.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

306

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

About HDMI
HDMI is an abbreviation of High-Definition Multimedia Interface, which is an AV digital interface that can be connected to a TV or amplifier. With the HDMI connection, high definition video and high quality audio formats adopted by Blu-ray Disc players (Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD) can be transmitted, which is not possible with the analog video transmission. Furthermore, in the HDMI connection, audio and video signals can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable, while in conventional connections it is necessary to provide audio and video cables separately for connection between devices. This allows you to simplify the wiring configuration that tends to be quite complex in a home theater system. This unit supports the following HDMI functions.
0 Deep Color An imaging technology supported by HDMI. Unlike RGB or YCbCr, which uses 8 bits (256 shades) per color, it can use 10 bits (1024 shades), 12 bits (4096 shades), or 16 bits (65536 shades) to produce colors in higher definition. Both devices linked via HDMI must support Deep Color.
0 x.v.Color This function lets HDTVs display colors more accurately. It enables display with natural, vivid colors. "x.v.Color" is trademark of Sony Corporation.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 3D This unit supports input and output of 3D (3 dimensional) video signals of HDMI. To play back 3D video, you need a TV and player that provide support for the HDMI 3D function and a pair of 3D glasses.
0 4K / 8K This unit supports input and output of 4K (3840 x 2160 pixels) and 8K (7680 x 4320 pixels) video signals of HDMI.
0 Content Type It automatically makes settings suitable for the video output type (content information).
0 Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color The color space defined by Adobe Systems Inc. Because it is a wider color space than RGB, it can produce more vivid and natural images.
0 sYCC601 color Each of these color spaces defines a palette of available colors that is larger than the traditional RGB color model.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

307

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

0 Auto Lip Sync This function can automatically correct delay between the audio and video. Use a TV that is compatible with the Auto Lip Sync function.
0 HDMI Pass Through Even when the power to this unit is set to standby, signals input from the HDMI input connector are output to a TV or other device that is connected to the HDMI output connector.
0 HDMI Control If you connect the unit and an HDMI Control function compatible TV or player with an HDMI cable and then enable the HDMI Control function setting on each device, the devices will be able to control each other. 0 Power off link This unit power off can be linked to the TV power off step. 0 Audio output destination switching From the TV, you can switch whether to output audio from the TV or the AV amplifier. 0 Volume adjustment You can adjust this unit's volume in the TV volume adjustment operation. 0 Input source switching You can switch this unit input sources through linkage to TV input switching. When playing the player, this unit input source switches to the source for that player.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

0 ARC (Audio Return Channel) This function transmits audio signals from the TV to this unit through the HDMI cable and plays back the audio from the TV on this unit based on the HDMI Control function.
If a TV without the ARC function is connected via HDMI connections, video signals of the playback device connected to this unit are transmitted to the TV, but this unit can not play back the audio from the TV. If you want to enjoy surround audio for TV program, a separate audio cable connection is required.
In contrast, if a TV with the ARC function is connected via HDMI connections, no audio cable connection is required. Audio signals from the TV can be input to this unit through the HDMI cable between this unit and the TV. This function allows you to enjoy surround playback on this unit for the TV.
0 eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) The eARC function is an extension of the conventional ARC function. It utilizes dedicated eARC function control to play back television audio from this unit without passing through HDMI control. Furthermore, the eARC function can transmit multichannel linear PCM, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS-HD, DTS:X and other audio formats not compatible with conventional ARC. Connecting to an eARC function-compatible television also enables enjoyment of higher-quality surround playback of the audio content played from your television.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

308

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

0 ALLM (Auto Low Latency Mode) This unit automatically switches to low latency mode depending on playback contents when using a combination of television and game console compatible with the ALLM function.
0 VRR (Variable Refresh Rate): VRR reduces or eliminates lag, stutter and frame tearing for more fluid and better detailed gameplay.
0 QFT (Quick Frame Transport): QFT reduces latency for smoother no-lag gaming, and real-time interactive virtual reality.
0 FRL (Fixed Rate Link): FRL (Fixed Rate Link) is transmission technology that is required to provide higher resolutions such as ultra high speed bandwidths of 4K 60Hz or higher.

NOTE
0 Some functions may not operate depending on the connected TV or player. Check the owner's manual of each device for details beforehand.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Supported audio formats

2-channel Linear PCM Multi-channel Linear PCM
Bitstream
DSD

2-channel, 32 kHz 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
7.1-channel, 32 kHz 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
Dolby Digital / DTS / Dolby Atmos / Dolby TrueHD / Dolby Digital Plus / DTS:X / DTS-HD / MPEG-H 2-channel 5.1-channel, 2.8 MHz

o Supported video signals

0 480i 0 576i 0 720p 60/50Hz 0 1080p 120/100/60/50/24Hz 0 8K 60/50/30/25/24Hz

0 480p 0 576p 0 1080i 60/50Hz 0 4K 120/100/60/50/30/25/24Hz

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

309

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Copyright protection system
In order to play back digital video and audio such as BD video or DVD video via HDMI connection, both this unit and the TV or player must to support the copyright protection system known as HDCP (Highbandwidth Digital Content Protection System). HDCP is copyright protection technology comprised of data encryption and authentication of the connected AV devices. This unit supports HDCP.
0 If a device that does not support HDCP is connected, video and audio are not output correctly. Read the owner's manual of your television or player for more information.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

310

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Video conversion function
This unit automatically converts the input video signals as shown in the diagram before outputting them to the TV.

Video device

This unit

HDMI-compatible TV

Output

HDMI signal

Input (IN)

HDMI connector

Output (HDMI OUT)

HDMI signal

HDMI connector

Appendix

Component video signal

Component video
connectors Video signal

Component video connectors

Video connector

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

311

Remote

0 The MAIN ZONE Video Conversion function is compatible with the following formats: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC4.43, PAL-N, PAL-M and PAL-60.
0 When component video signals are used, only 480i and 576i signals are converted to HDMI signals.
Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

When "HDMI Upscaler" in the menu is set to "Auto", this unit upscales the input HDMI video signal and then outputs it to the TV. (v p. 206)

Input signal HDMI
Component video Video

Output signal
480i/576i 480p/576p
480i/576i 480p/576p 720p 1080i 1080p 30/25/24Hz 1080p 60/50Hz 1080p 120/100Hz 4K 30/25/24Hz 4K 60/50Hz 4K 120/100Hz 8K 30/25/24Hz 8K 60/50Hz 480i/576i 480p/576p 720p 1080i 1080p 480i/576i

720p

1080i

HDMI

1080p 1080p 1080p

30/25/24Hz 60/50Hz 120/100Hz 30/25/24Hz 60/50Hz 120/100Hz 30/25/24Hz 60/50Hz

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

312

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing back a USB memory devices

o Compatible formats

WMAz1 MP3 WAV MPEG-4 AACz1 FLAC
Apple Losslessz2 DSD

Sampling frequency 32/44.1/48 kHz 32/44.1/48 kHz 32/44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz 32/44.1/48 kHz 44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz 44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz 2.8/5.6 MHz

Channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel
2-channel 2-channel

Bit rate 48 192 kbps 32 320 kbps
48 - 320 kbps

Extension .wma .mp3 .wav
.aac/.m4a .flac
.m4a .dsf/.dff

z1 Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit. Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected. Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer may be copyright protected, depending on the computer's settings.
z2 The Apple Lossless Audio Codec (ALAC) decoder is distributed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0).

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

313

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Maximum number of playable files and folder

The limits on the number of folders and files that can be displayed by this unit are as follows.

Item

Media USB memory device

Number of folder directory levels z1

8 levels

Number of folders

500

Number of filesz2

5000

z1 The limited number includes the root folder. z2 The allowable number of files may differ according to the USB memory device
capacity and the file size.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing back a Bluetooth device
This unit supports the following Bluetooth profile. 0 A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile):
When a Bluetooth device that supports this standard is connected, monaural and stereo sound data can be streamed at a high quality. 0 AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile): When a Bluetooth device that supports this standard is connected, the Bluetooth device can be operated from this unit.
o About Bluetooth communications
Radio waves broadcast from this unit may interfere with the operation of medical devices. Make sure you turn off the power of this unit and Bluetooth device in the following locations as radio wave interference may cause malfunctions. 0 Hospitals, trains, aircraft, petrol kiosks and places where flammable
gases are generated 0 Near automatic doors and fire alarms

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

314

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS

0 This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard. 0 This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4. 0 This unit is compatible with WMA META tags. 0 If the image size (pixels) of an album artwork exceeds 500 × 500 (WMA/MP3/WAV/FLAC/Apple Lossless/DSD) or 349 × 349 (MPEG-4 AAC), then
music may not be played back properly. 0 A server or server software compatible with distribution in the corresponding formats is required to play music files via a network.
For playing mentioned audio formats via a network a server software, for example Twonky Media Server or jRiver Media Server, needs to be installed on your computer or NAS for full support. There are other server software available too. Please check supported formats.

o Specifications of supported files

WMAz1 MP3 WAV MPEG-4 AACz1 FLAC
Apple Losslessz2 DSD

Sampling frequency 32/44.1/48 kHz 32/44.1/48 kHz 32/44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz 32/44.1/48 kHz 44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz 44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz 2.8/5.6 MHz

Channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel
2-channel 2-channel

Bit rate 48 192 kbps 32 320 kbps
48 - 320 kbps

Extension .wma .mp3 .wav
.aac/.m4a .flac
.m4a .dsf/.dff

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

315

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Playing back Internet Radio

o Playable broadcast station specifications

WMA MP3 MPEG-4 AAC

Sampling frequency 32/44.1/48 kHz 32/44.1/48 kHz 32/44.1/48 kHz

Bit rate 48 192
kbps 32 320
kbps 48 - 320
kbps

Extension .wma
.mp3 .aac/ .m4a

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Personal memory plus function
The most recently used settings (input mode, HDMI output mode, sound mode, tone control, channel level, MultEQ® XT32, Dynamic EQ, Dynamic Volume, Dirac Live, Restorer and audio delay, etc.) are saved for each input source.

0 "Surround Parameter" settings are stored for each sound mode.
Last function memory
This function stores the settings which were made before going into the standby mode.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

316

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Sound modes and channel output

S This indicates the audio output channels or surround parameters that can be set. D This indicates the audio output channels. The output channels depend on the settings of "Speaker Layout". (v p. 226)

Sound mode

Front L/R

Center

Surround L/R

Surround Back L/R

Direct/Pure Direct (2-channel) Direct/Pure Direct (Multi-channel) DSD Direct (2-channel) DSD Direct (Multi-channel) Stereo Dolby Atmos Dolby TrueHD Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Dolby Surround z1 IMAX DTS:X IMAX DTS DTS:X DTS-HD DTS Surround DTS Neural:X z2 DTS Virtual:X z3 AURO-3D AURO Surround Multi Ch In MPEG-H

Dz5

Dz6

Dz8 Dz8

Dz5

z1 - z10: "Sound modes and channel output" (v p. 318)

Front Wide L/R Dz5
D
Dz7 D D
Dz5 D
D

Front Height
L/R Dz5
D
D D D
D D
D

Top Front L/R Dz5
D
D D D
D Dz9
D

Channel output

Top Middle
L/R

Top

Rear

Height

L/R

Dz5 Dz5 Dz5

D Dz9

Surround Height
L/R Dz5
D
D D D
D D
D

Center Height Dz5
D D D D D

Top Surround Dz5
D D D D D

Front

Surround

Back

Dolby Atmos Dolby Atmos Dolby Atmos

Enabled Enabled Enabled

L/R

Dz5 Dz5 Dz5

Dz10 Dz10 Dz10

Subwoofer
Dz4 D
Dz4 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

317

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Sound mode
Multi Ch Stereo Rock Arena Jazz Club Mono Movie Video Game Matrix

Channel output

Front L/R

Center

Surround L/R

Surround Back L/R

Front Wide L/R

Front Height
L/R

Top Front L/R

Top Middle
L/R

Top Rear L/R

Rear Height
L/R

Surround Height
L/R

Center Height

Top Surround

Front

Surround

Back

Dolby Atmos Dolby Atmos Dolby Atmos

Enabled Enabled Enabled

L/R

Subwoofer

Dz11 Dz11 Dz11 Dz11 Dz11 Dz11 Dz11 Dz11 Dz11 Dz11 Dz11

Dz11 Dz11 Dz11 Dz11 Dz11 Dz11

Dz11 Dz11 Dz11

Dz11 Dz11 Dz11 Dz11 Dz11 Dz11 Dz11 Dz11 Dz11 Dz11 Dz11

Dz11 Dz11 Dz11 Dz11 Dz11 Dz11

Dz11 Dz11 Dz11

z1 The applicable sound mode includes "Dolby Surround" and sound modes that have "+Dolby Surround" in the sound mode name. z2 The applicable sound mode includes "DTS Neural:X" and sound modes that have "+Neural:X" in the sound mode name. z3 The applicable sound mode includes "DTS Virtual:X" and sound modes that have "+Virtual:X" in the sound mode name. z4 Audio is output when "Low Frequency Effects" - "Subwoofer Output" in the menu is set to "LFE + Main". (v p. 246) z5 A signal for each channel contained in an input signal is output as audio. z6 Audio is not output when the "Surround Parameter" - "Speaker Virtualizer" in the menu is set to "On" and "Speaker Layout" - "Surround Back" in the menu is set to "1 spkr".
(v p. 187, 228) z7 Audio is not output when the "Surround Parameter" - "Speaker Virtualizer" is set to "On". (v p. 187) z8 When "Speaker Layout" - "Surround Back" is set to "2 spkrs", "Speaker Layout" - "Center" is set to "Yes", and sound mode is set to "IMAX DTS", surround audio is output
from the surround back speaker. Audio is not output from the surround speaker. (v p. 228) z9 For the best AURO-3D experience Front Height, Top Surround and Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Top speakers. z10 For the best AURO-3D experience Front Height and Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute ceiling speakers or Dolby Atmos Enabled
speakers. z11 Audio is output from the speakers specified in the "Surround Parameter" - "Speaker Select" settings. (v p. 192)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

318

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Sound modes and surround parameters

Tips

Appendix

Sound mode

Cinema EQ

Loudness Management
z2

Dynamic Compression
z3

Dialog Control
z4

Direct/Pure Direct (2-channel) z1

Direct/Pure Direct (Multi-channel) z1

DSD Direct (2-channel)

DSD Direct (Multi-channel) Stereo Dolby Atmos Dolby TrueHD Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Dolby Surround IMAX DTS:X IMAX DTS DTS:X DTS-HD DTS Surround DTS Neural:X DTS Virtual:X AURO-3D AURO Surround Multi Ch In

MPEG-H Multi Ch Stereo Rock Arena Jazz Club Mono Movie Video Game

Matrix

z1 - z8 : "Sound modes and surround parameters" (v p. 321)

Low Frequency
E ects z5
S
S S S S S
S S S S S
S S S S S S S S S S

Delay Time
S

Surround Parameter

E ect Level

Room Size

Speaker Select z6

Center Spread

Speaker Virtualizer DTS Neural:X
z7

IMAX

IMAX Audio Settings

High Pass Filter z8

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

319

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Sound mode
Direct/Pure Direct (2-channel) z1 Direct/Pure Direct (Multi-channel) z1 DSD Direct (2-channel) DSD Direct (Multi-channel) Stereo Dolby Atmos Dolby TrueHD Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Dolby Surround IMAX DTS:X IMAX DTS DTS:X DTS-HD DTS Surround DTS Neural:X DTS Virtual:X AURO-3D AURO Surround Multi Ch In MPEG-H Multi Ch Stereo Rock Arena Jazz Club Mono Movie Video Game Matrix

Low Pass
Filter z8

Subwoofer
Output z8

Surround Parameter
Auro-Matic Auro-Matic Preset Strenght

AURO-3D Mode

Sz19 Sz19 Sz20

z1, z5, z8 - z20: "Sound modes and surround parameters" (v p. 321)

Subwoofer Sz16 Sz16 Sz18

Dialog Enhancer
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S

Audyssey

Tone z9

Subwoofer
Level Adjust MultEQ® XT32 Dynamic EQ z10 z11z12 z13z14

Dynamic Volume z13z14

Audyssey LFCTM
z13z14

Dirac Live

Restorer z15

Bass Sync z5

Sz16

Sz17

Sz16

Sz17

Sz18

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

320

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

z1 During playback in Pure Direct mode, the surround parameters are the same as in Direct mode. z2 This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Atmos signal is played. z3 This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS:X, DTS-HD or DTS signal is played. z4 This item can be selected when a DTS:X signal that is compatible with the Dialog Control function is input. z5 This can be set when the LFE signal is included in the input signal. z6 This item can be selected when Height, Ceiling or Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers are used. z7 This item can be set when any Height, Ceiling or Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers are not used, or Surround speakers are not used. z8 This item can be selected when "Surround Parameter" - "IMAX Audio Settings" in the menu is set to "Manual". (v p. 188) z9 This item cannot be set when "Dynamic EQ" is set to "On". (v p. 196) z10 This item cannot be set when "Speaker Layout" - "Subwoofers" in the menu is set to "No". (v p. 235) z11 This item cannot be set when Audyssey® Setup (Speaker Calibration) has not been performed. z12 This item cannot be selected when a DTS:X format with a sampling frequency of over 48 kHz is input. z13 This item cannot be set when sound mode is "DTS Virtual:X" or sound mode that have "+Virtual:X" in the sound mode name. z14 This item cannot be set when "MultEQ® XT32" in the menu is set to "Off". (v p. 195) z15 This item can be set when the input signal is analog, PCM 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz. z16 This setting is available when "Low Frequency Effects" - "Subwoofer Output" in the menu is set to "LFE + Main". (v p. 246) z17 Only the "Distances" and "Levels" settings are applied. The acoustic filter is not applied. z18 This item can be set when "Crossovers" - "Front" is set to other than "Full Range" or "Low Frequency Effects" - "Subwoofer Output" is set to "LFE + Main". (v p. 244,
246) z19 This cannot be set if the input signal contains AURO-3D signals containing a Height channel. z20 This can be set if the input signal contains an AURO-3D signal.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

321

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes

F This indicates the default sound mode. S This indicates the selectable sound mode.

Sound mode
Direct Direct DSD Direct
Pure Direct Pure Direct DSD Pure Direct
Stereo Stereo
Dolby Surround Dolby Atmos Dolby TrueHD Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Dolby (D+) (HD) + Dolby Surround Dolby (D+) (HD) + Neural:X Dolby Surround

NOTE

2-channel signal

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital

DTS-HD

DTS

Analog / PCM

DSD (Super Audio
CD)

S Sz2

z1 S S S

z1 - z5: "Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes" (v p. 325)

Dolby Dolby Atmos TrueHD

F Sz3 S Sz5

F S

Dolby Digital Plus
S
S
S
S F S

Dolby Digital (EX)
S
S
S
S F S

IMAX DTS:X
S
S
S

Multi-channel signal

IMAX DTS

DTS:X DTS-HD

DTS

PCM AURO-3D multi- MPEG-H
channel

DSD (Super Audio
CD)

Sz4

Sz4 Sz4

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

322

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Sound mode
DTS Surround IMAX DTS:X IMAX DTS DTS:X DTS-HD DTS Surround IMAX DTS + Neural:X IMAX DTS / IMAX DTS:X + Virtual:X DTS (-HD) + Dolby Surround DTS (-HD) + Neural:X DTS (-HD) / DTS:X + Virtual:X DTS Neural:X DTS Virtual:X
AURO-3D AURO-3D AURO Surround
Multi Ch In Multi Ch In / Multi Ch In 7.1 Multi In + Dolby Surround Multi In + Neural:X Multi In + Virtual:X

NOTE

2-channel signal

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital

DTS-HD

DTS

Analog / PCM

DSD (Super Audio
CD)

S S

S Fz10 Fz10 S

z11

z6 - z13 : "Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes" (v p. 325)

Dolby Atmos

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital (EX)
S S

IMAX DTS:X Fz6 Sz7
Sz6 Sz7

Multi-channel signal

IMAX DTS

DTS:X DTS-HD

DTS

PCM AURO-3D multi- MPEG-H
channel

DSD (Super Audio
CD)

Sz6
Sz7 Sz7 Fz6 Sz6
S Sz7 Sz7

F Sz10

S
S Fz9
S

Sz8
Sz8 Sz8 Sz8

Sz12 Fz13

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

323

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Sound mode
MPEG-H MPEG-H
Original sound mode Multi Ch Stereo Rock Arena Jazz Club Mono Movie Video Game Matrix

NOTE

2-channel signal

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital

DTS-HD

DTS

Analog / PCM

DSD (Super Audio
CD)

Dolby Atmos

Dolby TrueHD

S Sz14 S

z14 : "Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes" (v p. 325)

Dolby Digital Plus
S S S S S S

Dolby Digital (EX)
S S S S S S

IMAX DTS:X
S S S S S S

Multi-channel signal

IMAX DTS

DTS:X DTS-HD

DTS

PCM AURO-3D multi- MPEG-H
channel

DSD (Super Audio
CD)

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

324

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

z1 This item can be selected when using any of the Surround Back, Front Height, Top Front, Top Middle, Top Rear, Rear Height, Front Dolby, Surround Dolby or Back Dolby speaker. It can also be selected when the "Surround Parameter" - "Speaker Virtualizer" setting is turned "On".
z2 The default sound mode for the AirPlay playback is "Direct". z3 This can be selected when the Dolby Atmos signal contains the Dolby TrueHD signal. z4 This item can be selected if the AURO-3D signal contains Dolby TrueHD. z5 This can be selected when the Dolby Atmos signal contains the Dolby Digital Plus signal. z6 Selectable when "Surround Parameter" - "IMAX" is set to "Auto" in the menu. (v p. 188) z7 Selectable when "Surround Parameter" - "IMAX" is set to "Off". (Selectable sound modes vary depending on the type of input signal). (v p. 188) z8 This item can be selected if the AURO-3D signal contains DTS-HD. z9 This item cannot be selected when a DTS(-HD) format with a sampling frequency of over 48 kHz is input. z10 This item cannot be selected when a DTS:X format with a sampling frequency of over 48 kHz is input. z11 This item cannot be selected if the sampling frequency of the input signal is 32 kHz. z12 This item can be selected if the AURO-3D signal contains Multi Channel PCM. z13 Multi ch In 7.1 can be selected only when the input signals include surround back signals and surround back speakers are being used. z14 This can be selected when the Dolby Atmos signal contains the Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus signal.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

325

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Explanation of terms

o Audyssey
Audyssey Dynamic EQ®
Audyssey Dynamic EQ® solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and room acoustics. Audyssey Dynamic EQ® works in tandem with Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 to provide well-balanced sound for every listener at any volume level.
Audyssey Dynamic Volume®
Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large variations in volume level between television programs, commercials, and between the soft and loud passages of movies. Audyssey Dynamic EQ® is integrated into Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is adjusted automatically, the perceived bass response, tonal balance, surround impression, and dialog clarity remain the same.

Audyssey LFCTM (Low Frequency Containment)
Audyssey LFCTM solves the problem of low frequency sounds disturbing people in neighboring rooms or apartments. Audyssey LFCTM dynamically monitors the audio content and removes the low frequencies that pass through walls, floors and ceilings. It then applies psychoacoustic processing to restore the perception of low bass for listeners in the room. The result is great sound that no longer disturbs the neighbors.
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 is a room equalization solution that calibrates any audio system so that it can achieve optimum performance for every listener in a large listening area. Based on several room measurements, MultEQ® XT32 calculates an equalization solution that corrects for both time and frequency response problems in the listening area and also performs a fully automated surround system setup.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

326

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Dirac Live
Dirac Live® room correction
Dirac Live® is an advanced room correction technology developed by Dirac Research. As the most advanced room correction technology available on the market, Dirac Live helps listeners to correct for one of the weakest components in the audio chain: the listening room. Dirac Live not only corrects the frequency response, but also the impulse response of the loudspeakers in a room, yielding improved imaging and timbre, better clarity, tighter bass, and less early reflections, as well as reduced resonances and room modes. The market leader in room correction, this sophisticated algorithm is used in high-end AVRs, in luxury car sound systems from companies such as Rolls Royce, BMW, and Bentley, as well as in thousands of high-end digital cinema theaters across the world.

o AURO-3D
Auro-3D® The Auro-3D® technology suite is a groundbreaking new audio technology that combines height-based listening formats with powerful creative tools to deliver an unrivaled three-dimensional sound experience. Auro-3D® is the general format name for Sound in 3D and its related speaker lay-outs.
Auro-Matic® Auro-Matic® up-mixing technology software is a unique creative tool that transforms legacy Mono, Stereo and Surround content into a natural 3D or 2D listening experience.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

327

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Dolby
Dolby Atmos
Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and immersion to the Home Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces audio as independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and move dynamically throughout the 3 dimensional listening space during playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height plane of sound above the listener.
Dolby Atmos Stream
Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos Enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains special metadata that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This object audio data is decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV receiver and scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker systems of every size and configuration.

Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a multi-channel digital signal format developed by Dolby Laboratories. A total of 5.1-channels are played: 3 front channels ("FL", "FR" and "C"), 2 surround channels ("SL" and "SR") and the "LFE" channel for low frequency effects. Because of this, there is no crosstalk between channels and a realistic sound field with a "three-dimensional" feeling (sense of distance, movement and positioning) is achieved. This delivers a thrilling surround sound experience in the home.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal format that is compatible with up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound and also improves sound quality thanks to extra data bit rate performance. It is upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby Digital, so it offers greater flexibility in response to the source signal and the conditions of the playback device.
Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1 content for playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby Surround is compatible with traditional speaker layouts, as well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ inceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker technology.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

328

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Dolby Speaker Technology (Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers)
A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers employ the ceiling above you as a reflective surface for reproducing audio in the height plane above the listener. These speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal processing. These features can be built into a conventional speaker or standalone speaker module. The features minimally impact the overall speaker footprint while providing an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and Dolby Surround playback.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is a high definition audio technology developed by Dolby Laboratories, using lossless coding technology to faithfully reproduce the sound of the studio master. This format provides the facility to support up to 8 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz/24 bit resolution and up to 6 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 192 kHz/24 bit resolution.

Speaker Virtualizer
Dolby Atmos height virtualization is a digital signal processing solution that leverages Dolby's deep understanding of human audio perception to create the sensation of overhead sound from the listener-level speakers. This signal processing applies height-cue filters to overhead audio components contained within the audio signal before they are mixed into the listener-level speakers. These filters simulate the natural spectral cues imparted by our ears to sounds that originate from overhead. For stereo and 3.1-channel speaker configuration, Dolby Atmos height virtualization is combined with surround virtualization to create an enveloping 360-degree audio minus the speakers that would ordinarily be employed behind or to the side of the listener.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

329

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o DTS
Dialog Control Gives you control of the listening experience. You can lift the dialog out from the background sounds when clarity and intelligibility are desired. This requires that content has been authored to support Dialog Control.
DTS This is an abbreviation of Digital Theater System, which is a digital audio system developed by DTS. DTS delivers a powerful and dynamic surround sound experience, and is found in the world's finest movie theaters and screening rooms.
DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 is a digital audio format enabling high sound quality playback in 5.1-channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24 bit quantization on DVD-Video.
DTS Digital Surround DTSTM Digital Surround is the standard digital surround format of DTS, Inc., compatible with a sampling frequency of 44.1 or 48 kHz and up to 5.1-channels of digital discrete surround sound.

DTS-ESTM Discrete 6.1
DTS-ESTM Discrete 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format adding a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder.
DTS-ESTM Matrix 6.1
DTS-ESTM Matrix 6.1 is a 6.1-channel audio format that inserts a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound through matrix encoding. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder.
DTS Express
DTS Express is an audio format supporting low bit rates (max. 5.1channels, 24 to 256 kbps).
DTS-HD
This audio technology provides higher sound quality and enhanced functionality than the conventional DTS and is adopted as an optional audio for Blu-ray Disc. This technology supports multi-channel, high data transfer speed, high sampling frequency, and lossless audio playback. Maximum 7.1-channels are supported in Blu-ray Disc.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

330

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an improved version of the conventional DTS, DTS-ES and DTS 96/24 signals formats, compatible with sampling frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound. High data bit rate performance provides high quality sound. This format is fully compatible with conventional products, including conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is a lossless audio format created by Digital Theater System (DTS). This format provides the facility to support up to 8 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz/24 bit resolution and up to 6 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 192 kHz/24 bit resolution. It is fully compatible with conventional products, including conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.
DTS:X
DTS:X produces a hemisphere of audio, where flyovers as well as ambient backgrounds become truly enveloping. DTS:X objects enable audio to move smoothly from one speaker to any other creating life-like realism.

DTS Neural:X Enables an immersive audio experience for older content. DTS Neural:X can upmix your stereo, 5.1 or 7.1 content to take full advantage of all speakers in your surround sound system.
DTS Virtual:X DTS Virtual:X allows you to enjoy multi-dimensional sound regardless of room size, layout, or speaker configuration.
IMAX® IMAX® is well admired around the world for a premium large format movie experience. IMAX delivers the most advanced movie projection technology combined with rich, deep sound.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

331

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Audio
Apple Lossless Audio Codec
This is a codec for lossless audio compression method developed by Apple Inc. This codec can be played back on iTunes, iPod or iPhone. Data compressed to approximately 60 70 % can be decompressed to exactly the same original data.
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec)
FLAC stands for Free lossless Audio Codec, and is a lossless free audio file format. Lossless means that the audio is compressed without any loss in quality. The FLAC license is as shown below. Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Josh Coalson Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 0 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 0 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 0 Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
LFE
This is an abbreviation of Low Frequency Effect, which is an output channel that emphasizes low frequency effect sound. Surround audio is intensified by outputting 20 Hz to 120 Hz deep bass to the system subwoofer(s).
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3)
This is an internationally standardized audio data compression scheme, using the "MPEG-1" video compression standard. It compresses the data volume to about one eleventh its original size while maintaining sound quality equivalent to a music CD.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

332

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group), MPEG-2, MPEG-4
These are the names for digital compression format standards used for the encoding of video and audio. Video standards include "MPEG-1 Video", "MPEG-2 Video", "MPEG-4 Visual", "MPEG-4 AVC". Audio standards include "MPEG-1 Audio", "MPEG-2 Audio", "MPEG-4 AAC".
MPEG-H
MPEG-H 3D Audio is a new audio technology to truly immerse and envelop listeners in sound from all directions, which opens an entire next level of sound going beyond stereo and surround. With sound coming from above, a third dimension is added to the audio experience making it much more realistic and natural. Thanks to its unique personalization features, MPEG-H 3D Audio also offers users a great flexibility to actively engage with the content and adapt it to their own preferences. MPEG-H 3D Audio enables true object based sound and is also the basis of Sony's 360 Reality Audio for immersive music streaming services. 360 Reality Audio makes it possible for artists and creators to produce music by mapping sound sources such as vocals, chorus and instruments with positional information and placing them within a spherical space.

WMA (Windows Media Audio)
This is audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA data can be encoded using Windows Media® Player. To encode WMA files, only use applications authorized by Microsoft Corporation. If you use an unauthorized application, the file may not work properly.
Sampling frequency
Sampling involves taking a reading of a sound wave (analog signal) at regular intervals and expressing the height of the wave at each reading in digitized format (producing a digital signal). The number of readings taken in one second is called the "sampling frequency". The larger the value, the closer the reproduced sound is to the original.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

333

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Speaker impedance This is an AC resistance value, indicated in (ohms). Greater power can be obtained when this value is smaller.
Dialogue normalization function This function operates automatically during playback of Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS or DTS-HD sources. It automatically corrects the standard signal level for individual program sources.
Dynamic range The difference between the maximum undistorted sound level and the minimum discernible level above the noise emitted by the device.
Downmix This function converts the number of channels of surround audio to a lower number of channels and plays back according to the system's configuration.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

o Video
Progressive (sequential scanning) This is a scanning system of the video signal that displays 1 frame of video as one image. Compared to the interlace system, this system provides images with less flickering and jagged edges.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

334

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Network
AirPlay AirPlay sends (plays) contents recorded in iTunes or on an iPhone/iPod touch/iPad to a compatible device via the network.
WEP Key (network key) This is key information used for encrypting data when conducting data transfer. On this unit, the same WEP key is used for data encryption and decryption, so the same WEP key must be set on both devices in order for communications to be established between them.
Wi-Fi® Wi-Fi Certification assures tested and proven interoperability by the Wi-Fi Alliance, a group certifying interoperability among wireless LAN devices.
WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) This is a security standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance. In addition to the conventional SSID (network name) and WEP key (network key), it also uses a user identification function and encrypting protocol for stronger security.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2) This is a new version of the WPA established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, compatible with more secure AES encryption.
WPA/WPA2-Personal This is a simple authentication system for mutual authentication when a preset character string matches on the wireless LAN access point and client.
WPA2/WPA3-Personal WPA2/WPA3-Personal Mode was defined by Wi-Fi Alliance® to minimize user disruption and provide a gradual migration path to WPA3-Personal while maintaining interoperability with WPA2-Personal only devices.
WPA3-Personal WPA3-Personal replaces the WPA2-Personal Pre-Shared Key (PSK) authentication with Simultaneous authentication of equals (SAE). Unlike PSK, SAE is resistant to offline dictionary attacks.
Network Names (SSID: Service Set Identifier) When forming wireless LAN networks, groups are formed to prevent interference, data theft, etc. These groups are based on "SSID (network names)". For enhanced security, a WEP key is set so that communication is unavailable unless both the "SSID" and the WEP key match. This is suitable for constructing a simplified network.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

335

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

o Others
HDCP When transmitting digital signals between devices, this copyright protection technology encrypts the signals to prevent content from being copied without authorization.
MAIN ZONE The room where this unit is placed is called the MAIN ZONE.
Pairing Pairing (registration) is an operation that is required in order to connect a Bluetooth device to this unit using Bluetooth. When paired, the devices authenticate each other and can connect without mistaken connections occurring. When using Bluetooth connection for the first time, you need to pair this unit and the Bluetooth device to be connected.
Protection circuit This is a function to prevent damage to devices within the power supply when an abnormality such as an overload, excess voltage occurs or over temperature for any reason.

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

336

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Trademark information

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Apple, AirPlay, iPad, iPad Air, iPad Pro, iPhone and Mac are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
The trademark "iPhone" is used in Japan with a license from Aiphone K.K.
Use of the Works with Apple badge means that an accessory has been designed to work specifically with the technology identified in the badge and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.

Manufactured under license from Auro Technologies. Auro-3D® and the related symbols are registered trademarks of Auro Technologies. All materials contained in this work are protected by copyright law and may not be reproduced, distributed, transmitted, displayed, published or broadcast without the prior written permission of Auro Technologies NV or in case of third party materials, the owner of that content. You may not alter or remove any trademark, copyright or other notice from copies of the content.
Auro Technologies: mail info@auro-technologies.com, phone +32-(0)-14314343, fax +32-(0)-14321224, www.auro-technologies.com

Manufactured under license from Audyssey LaboratoriesTM. U.S. and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and Audyssey LFCTM are registered trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

337

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS, Inc. DTS, DTS:X, and the DTS:X logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States and other countries. © 2021 DTS, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
The terms HDMI, HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, HDMI Trade dress and the HDMI Logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc. HDR10+TM logo is a trademark of HDR10+ Technologies, LLC.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

338

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Manufactured under license from IMAX Corporation. IMAX® is a registered trademark of IMAX Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. All Rights Reserved. For DTS patents, see http:// patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

The MPEG-H TV Audio system logo is a trademark of Fraunhofer IIS and is registered in Germany and other countries.
App Store® is registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Google Play and the Google Play logo are trademarks of Google LLC.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

339

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

340

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Specifications

Audio section
0 Power amplifier Rated output:
Dynamic power: Output connectors:

Front: 140 W + 140 W (8 /ohms, 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.) 175 W + 175 W (6 /ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.) Center: 140 W (8 /ohms, 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.) 175 W (6 /ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.) Surround: 140 W + 140 W (8 /ohms, 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.) 175 W + 175 W (6 /ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.) Surround back / Height1 / Height2 / Height3 / Front wide: 140 W + 140 W (8 /ohms, 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.) 175 W + 175 W (6 /ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.) 160 W x 2-channel (8 /ohms) 250 W x 2-channel (4 /ohms) 4 16 /ohms

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

341

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

0 Analog Input sensitivity: Frequency response: S/N: Distortion: Rated output:
0 Digital D/A output:
Digital input: 0 Phono equalizer
Input sensitivity: RIAA deviation: S/N: Distortion factor:

200 mV 10 Hz 100 kHz -- +1, 3 dB (Direct mode) 102 dB (IHFA weighted, Direct mode) 0.005 % (20 Hz 20 kHz) (Direct mode) 1.2 V
Rated output -- 2 V (at 0 dB playback) Total harmonic distortion -- 0.004 % (1 kHz, at 0 dB) S/N ratio -- 104 dB Dynamic range -- 104 dB Format -- Digital audio interface
2.5 mV ±1 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz) 74 dB (IHF-A) 0.03 % (1 kHz, 3 V)

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

342

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Video section
0 Standard video connectors Input level and impedance: Frequency response:
0 Color component video connector Input level and impedance:
Frequency response:

1 Vp-p, 75 /ohms 5 Hz 10 MHz -- 0, 3 dB
Y signal -- 1 Vp-p, 75 /ohms PB / CB signal -- 0.7 Vp-p, 75 /ohms PR / CR signal -- 0.7 Vp-p, 75 /ohms 5 Hz 60 MHz -- 0, 3 dB

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

343

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Tuner section
Reception frequency range: Effective sensitivity: 50 dB sensitivity: S/N ratio: Distortion:

[FM] (Note: V at 75 /ohms, 0 dBf = 1 x 10 15 W) 87.5 MHz 107.9 MHz 1.2 V (12.8 dBf) MONO 2.8 V (20.2 dBf) MONO 70 dB (IHFA weighted, Direct mode) STEREO 67 dB (IHFA weighted, Direct mode) MONO 0.7 % (1 kHz) STEREO 1.0 % (1 kHz)

[AM]
520 kHz 1710 kHz 18 V

Wireless LAN section

Network type (wireless LAN standard): Security:
Used frequency range:

Conforming to IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac (Wi-Fi® compliant) z1 WEP 64 bit, WEP 128 bit WPA/WPA2-PSK (AES) WPA/WPA2-PSK (TKIP) WPA3-SAE (AES) 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz

z1 The Wi-Fi® CERTIFIED Logo and the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED On-Product Logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

344

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Bluetooth section

Communications system: Transmission power: Maximum communication range: Used frequency range: Modulation scheme: Supported profiles:
Corresponding codec: Transmission range (A2DP):

Bluetooth Specification Version 5.4 Bluetooth Specification Power Class 1 Approx. 98.4 ft/30 m in line of sight z2 2.4 GHz FHSS (Frequency-Hopping Spread Spectrum) Receiver function A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) 1.4 AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile) 1.5 Transmitter function A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) 1.4 SBC 20 Hz 20,000 Hz

z2 The actual communication range varies depending on the influence of such factors as obstructions between devices, electromagnetic waves from microwave ovens, static electricity, cordless phones, reception sensitivity, antenna performance, operating system, application software etc.

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

345

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

General

Operating temperature:

41 °F - 95 °F (5 °C - 35 °C)

Power supply:

AC 120 V, 60 Hz

Power consumption:

750 W

Power consumption in standby mode: 0.1 Wz

Power consumption in CEC standby mode:

0.5 W

z When "Network Control" in the menu is set to "Off In Standby" and "HDMI Pass Through" is set to "Off".

For purposes of improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice.

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

346

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

o Dimensions (Unit : in. (mm))

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

1.9 0.9 (47) (22)

(32)

1.3

9.2 (237) 15.5 (393)

15.3 (389)

13.3 (339)

(55)

2.2

(18)

0.7

(32)

1.3

17.1 (434)

9.3 (237)

6.6 (167)

5.8 (148)

1.8 (45)
o Weight: 34.4 lb (15.6 kg)

Front panel

Display

13.5 (344)

0.8

2.4 (60)
1.8 (45)

(19)

Rear panel

347

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

Index
v Numerics 11.1-channel .................................................. 57 13.1-channel .................................................. 62 3D ................................................................ 307 4K/8K ........................................................... 307 5.1-channel .................................................... 49 7.1-channel .................................................... 50 9.1-channel .................................................... 52
v A AirPlay .......................................................... 127 All Zone Stereo ............................................ 139 Audio formats ....................... 309, 313, 315, 316 Audio settings ....................................... 178, 184 Audyssey Dynamic EQ® ............................. 326 Audyssey Dynamic Volume® ...................... 326 Audyssey LFCTM .......................................... 326 Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 ............................ 326 Audyssey settings ................................ 195, 217 Audyssey Sub EQ HTTM ............................... 216 Audyssey® Setup ........................................ 215 Auto sound mode ......................................... 144 Auto Standby ............................................... 265

v B Bi-amp ............................................................ 65 Bluetooth device ............................................ 97 Blu-ray Disc player ................................... 78, 91
v C Cable TV ........................................................ 76
v D Dirac Live ..................................................... 252 Direct sound mode ....................................... 149 Display ........................................................... 24 Dolby Atmos ................................................. 328 Dolby sound mode ............................... 145, 328 DTS sound mode ................................. 146, 330 DVD player ............................................... 78, 91
v E ECO Mode ................................................... 262 External control device ................................... 86

v F Firmware Update .......................................... 272 FM/AM antenna ...................................... 82, 105 Front panel ..................................................... 20
v G Game console ................................................ 79 General settings ................................... 181, 262
v H HDCP ........................................................... 310 HDMI Control ....................................... 155, 202 HEOS Account ..................................... 119, 261 HEOS Favorites ........................................... 133

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

348

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

Tips

Appendix

v I Input Assign ................................................. 210 Input settings ........................................ 179, 210 Input source ................................................... 90 Internet Radio ............................................... 112
v L Listening position ......................................... 215
v M Menu map .................................................... 178 Muting ............................................................ 91

v N NAS ............................................................. 114 Network settings .......................................... 253
v O Original sound mode .................................... 148
v P Pairing ...................................................... 97, 98 PC ................................................................ 114 PCM multi-channel sound mode .................. 148 Protection circuit .......................................... 336 Pure direct .................................................... 144
v Q Queue ............................................ 93, 115, 122 Quick select plus .......................................... 158

v R Rear panel ...................................................... 26 Remote control unit ........................................ 30 Resetting factory settings ............................. 304 Resetting network settings ........................... 305 Restorer ....................................................... 193
v S Satellite tuner ................................................. 76 Set-top box ..................................................... 76 Setup Assistant ............................................ 182 Sleep timer ................................................... 156 Sound mode ................................................. 142 Speaker connection ....................................... 40 Speaker settings .................................. 179, 215 Spotify .......................................................... 130 Stereo sound mode ...................................... 149

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

349

Remote

Index

Contents

Connections

Playback

Settings

v T Tips .............................................................. 280 Troubleshooting ........................................... 282 TV ............................................................ 73, 74
v U USB memory device ................................ 81, 92
v V Video Select ................................................. 138 Video settings ....................................... 178, 200 Volume ................................................... 91, 134

v W Web control .................................................. 165 Wi-Fi settings ............................................... 254 Wired LAN .............................................. 84, 253 Wireless LAN ......................................... 85, 254
v Z ZONE2/ZONE3 ...................................... 68, 168

Tips

Appendix

Front panel

Display

Rear panel

350

Remote

Index

www.denon.com
351

HEOS app update
.
HEOS app update

HEOS app update

The HEOS App was updated to version 3.0 in December 2023. The user interface has been updated to further improve ease of use.
o HEOS App Screen Layout The new HEOS App comprises Home, Rooms and Search screens.

n Home Selecting the music track or station from music sources.

Home

Recent

HEOS Favorite Stations

New Music

Music Services

Edit

Sources

Edit

Bluetooth

Song 1 Living Room

Home

Rooms

.
Display the Now Playing screen. "Now Playing" (v p. 3 )
P Settings: Display the Settings menu "Settings" (v p. 4 ) M AVR remote app: Switch to the AVR remote app.

0 All music services displayed may not be available in your location.

n Rooms Selecting a room/device.
Edit
Rooms
Drag one room into another to group them
Bedroom Song 1
Kitchen Song 2
Living Room Song 3

Song 1 Bedroom

Home

Rooms

.
0 Tap the "Edit" at the top right to switch edit mode. You can change the displayed name.
0 Multiple devices can be grouped together. "Settings" (v p. 4 )

HEOS app update

n Search Search for the music or video you wish to play.

Filter

All

Tracks

Artists

Playlists

Podcasts

Search all your music
Start typing the name of a playlist, artist, track, album, podcast or radio station.

Song 1 Bedroom
Home

Rooms

Now Playing
The Now Playing screen is displayed.

Audio file

Streaming

0:51
Song Artist

-3:01 HD

55 Living Room

Song Station

LIVE

Living Room

.
O Add to favorites (this is grayed out if the content cannot be added to favorites). N More InfoDisplay information about the song currently being played. S Adjust the sound options for the song currently being played. R Create and edit playlists.

HEOS app update

Settings
The Settings menu is displayed.

Home
Settings
Add Device

What's New My Devices

Voice Assistants

Music Sources

App Appearance

Light

Software Update

Help

Tips for HEOS

Development

.
Q AccountDisplay account information.

n Listening to the same music in multiple rooms
Grouping rooms
1 Press and hold your finger on room that is not playing music. 2 Drag it into the room that is playing music and lift your finger. 3 The two rooms will be grouped together into a single device
group and both rooms will be playing the same music in perfect sync.

Edit
Rooms
Drag one room into another to group them

Bedroom Song 1
Kitchen LSivTiAnYg,TRHEoKoImD LAROI & JUSTIN...
Song 1

Edit
Rooms
Drag one room into another to group them
Bedroom Song 1
Kitchen + Living Room Song 1
Kitchen Living Room
Drag a room out of this group to ungroup it

Song 1 Bedroom

Home

Rooms

Song 1 Bedroom
Home

Rooms

HEOS app update

Ungrouping rooms
1 Press and hold your finger on room that you want to remove from the group.
2 Drag it out of the group and lift your finger.

Edit
Rooms
Drag one room into another to group them
Bedroom Song 1

Kitchen +Living Room Song 1
Kitchen
DLraivginagroRoomoomut of this group to ungroup it

Edit
Rooms
Drag one room into another to group them
Bedroom Song 1
Kitchen Song 1
Living Room Song 1

Song 1 Bedroom

Home

Rooms

Song 1 Bedroom
Home

Rooms

Grouping all rooms (party mode)
You can easily group 16 rooms together into Party Mode by using a "pinch" gesture.
1 Place two fingers on the screen over the list of rooms. 2 Quickly pinch your two fingers together and release. 3 All of your rooms will be joined together and begin playing the
same music in perfect sync.

Edit
Rooms
Drag one room into another to group them

Bedroom Song 1

Kitchen Song 1

Living Room Song 1

Edit
Rooms
Drag one room into another to group them
Bedroom + Kitchen + Living.. Song 1
Bedroom Kitchen Living Room
Drag a room out of this group to ungroup it

Song 1 Bedroom

Home

Rooms

Song 1 Bedroom
Home

Rooms

HEOS app update

Ungrouping all rooms
You can easily ungroup all of your rooms and exit Party Mode by using a "spread" gesture.
1 Place two fingers close together on the screen over list of rooms.
2 Quickly spread your two fingers apart from each other and release.
3 All of your rooms will be ungrouped.

Edit
Rooms
Drag one room into another to group them

Bedroom + Kitchen + Living.. Song 1
Bedroom Kitchen Living Room
Drag a room out of this group to ungroup it

Edit
Rooms
Drag one room into another to group them
Bedroom Song 1
Kitchen Song 1
Living Room Song 1

Song 1 Bedroom

Home

Rooms

Song 1 Bedroom
Home

Rooms

.
www.denon.com